You are on page 1of 462

EP2050

SERVICE MANUAL

CONTENTS
GENERAL
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7 6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8 7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9 8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 8-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-11 8-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13 8-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14 8-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15 8-5. Users Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16 8-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1 2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2 3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4 4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5 5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-8 5-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9 6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-13 7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-23 7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24

CONTENTS
8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-25 8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-25 8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-26 8-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27 9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-29 9-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-30 9-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-34 9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-35 9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-35 9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-39 9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44 10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48 10-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-48 10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-49 10-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-50 10-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51 10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53 10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54 11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-57 11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-59 11-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-59 11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-60 11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61 12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62 12-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-62 12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63 12-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-64 12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65

ii

CONTENTS
12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-67 12-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-68 12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-71 12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-72 12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-75 12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77 13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-78 13-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-78 13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-79 13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80 13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-80 13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-81 13-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82 13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-84 13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85 13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-86 13-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-87 13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-88 13-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-90 13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-91 13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-92 13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-93 13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94 14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-96 14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-97 14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98 15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-99 15-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-99 15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-100 15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-101 15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102

iii

CONTENTS
16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS . . . . . . . . M-104 16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-104 16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-105 16-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-106 16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107 17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-109 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-110 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-110 17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111 17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-113 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-113 17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-114 17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115 17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-116 17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-117 18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118 19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-120 19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-121 19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122 20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-123 20-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-123 20-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-124 20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-124 20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-125 20-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-126 20-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127

iv

CONTENTS
21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-131 21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-132 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133 21-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134 22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136 22-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-136 23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-137 24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-141

SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

GENERAL

1 SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE PHOTOCONDUCTOR COPYING SYSTEM PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM : Desktop (with Stationary Platen) : Organic Photoconductor : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain Paper : 3-Way Feeding 1st Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray (500 sheets of paper)

2nd Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray (500 sheets of paper) Multi Bypass Table (50 sheets of paper) EXPOSURE SYSTEM DEVELOPING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM IMAGE TRANSFER SYSTEM PAPER SEPARATING SYSTEM FUSING SYSTEM PAPER DISCHARGING SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure : Minolta New Micro-Toning System : Single-Wire DC Negative Corona with Scorotron System : Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DC Negative Corona with Corotron System : Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plus Paper Separator Fingers : Heat Roller : Charge Neutralizing Brush

MAXIMUM ORIGINAL SIZE COPY MEDIUM:

: A3L or 11" 17"L (L: Lengthwise)

1st Drawer (Automatic feeding) Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m 2 ) Medium Translucent paper Transparencies Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m 2) Recycled paper
Dimensions

2nd Drawer (Automatic feeding) O O 297 432 mm 140 182 mm

Multi Bypass Table O O O O O 297 432 mm 100 140 mm *1 *1 *1

O O 297 432 mm 140 182 mm

Maximum (Width Length) Minimum (Width Length)

O: Permissible

: Not permissible 1: 20 sheets or less

G-1

MULTIPLE COPIES WARMING-UP TIME FIRST COPY TIME

: 1 to 99 : 150 sec. or less with room temperature of 20C and rated power voltage : A4C or 8-1/2" 11"C: 6.8 sec. or less

CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.) (Zoom Ratio 1.000) Area Size Metric A3L A4L A4C B4L 14 19 25 16 Inch
Zoom Ratio

100.0%

Area Size

Zoom Ratio

100.0% 14 20 25

11" 17" (L) 8-1/2" 11" (L) 8-1/2" 11" (C)

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise
ZOOM RATIOS: Area Mode Fixed Full Size Reduction 100.0% 81.6% 70.7% 50.0% 100.0% 78.5% 73.3% 64.7% 50.0% Enlargement 200.0% 141.4% 115.4% 200.0% 154.5% 129.4% 121.4% Variable LENS EXPOSURE LAMP FUSING TEMPERATURE 50.0% to 200.0% (in 0.1% increments) : Through Lens (F = 6.0, f = 180 mm) : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp : During a copy cycle = 185C In Standby = 185C Metric Inch

G-2

POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only): Exposure Lamp (Rating) Fusing Heater Lamp (Rating) 115, 127 V 850 W 120 V 850 W 200 V 850 W 200 V 850 W Max. Power Consumption Max. Current Consumption 11.2 A (115 V) 10.1 A (127 V) 11.2 A 6.7 A 6.1 A

Voltage

In Standby

115, 127 V

80 V 230 W 80 V 230 W 160 V 250 W 160 V 250 W

1240 W

900 W

120 V 200 ~ 220 V 220 ~ 240 V POWER REQUIREMENT

1290 W 1260 ~ 1400 W 1260 ~ 1390 W

960 W 940 ~ 1070 W 940 ~ 1070 W

: 115 V, 120 V, 127 V, 200 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V; 50/60 Hz

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Temperature Humidity Ambient Illumination Levelness DIMENSIONS 10 to 35C with a fluctuation of 10C or less per hour 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 20% RH or less per hour 3,000 lux or less 1 (1.75 mm/100 mm) : Width .... 620 mm Depth .... 685 mm Height ... 602 mm (including Original Glass) : 75 kg (excluding the Exit Tray, starter, toner, and copy paper) : Operators Manual, Setting-up Instructions, Starter, Exit Tray, Users Choice Card1 . " 1. Except Europe"

WEIGHT STANDARD ACCESSORIES

G-3

2 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
To ensure easy copier operation, supply replacement, and service maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
* Be sure to allow a clearance of 150 (6") mm. or more at the back of the

copier as there is a ventilation duct.

2,165 300 200

1136O162AA

1,350 1,310 150

1136O163AA

<Unit: mm>

G-4

3 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION


Installation Site To ensure safety and utmost performance of the copier, the copier should NOT be used in a place: q Where it will be subject to extremely high or low temperature or humidity. q Which is exposed to direct sunlight. q Which is in the direct air stream of an air conditioner, heater or ventilator. q Which puts the operator in the direct stream of exhaust from the copier. q Which has poor ventilation. q Where ammonia gas might be generated. q Which does not have a stable, level floor. q Where it will be subject to sudden fluctuations in either temperature or humidity. If a cold room is quickly heated, condensation forms inside the copier, resulting in blank spots in the copy. q Which is near any kind of heating device. q Where it may be splashed with water. q Which is dirty or where it will receive undue vibration. q Which is near volatile flammables or curtains. Power Source Use an outlet with a capacity of 115/120/127V, 13.2A or more, or 200/220/240V, 8.1A or more. q If any other electrical equipment is sourced from the same power outlet, make sure that the capacity of the outlet is not exceeded. q Use a power source with little voltage fluctuation. q Never connect by means of a multiple socket any other appliances or machines to the outlet being used for the copier. q Make the following checks at frequent intervals: Is the power plug abnormally hot? Are there any cracks or scrapes in the cord? Has the power plug been inserted fully into the outlet? Does something, including the copier itself, ride on the power cord? q Ensure that the copier does not ride on the power cord or communications cable of other electrical equipment, and that it does not become wedged into or underneath the mechanism. Grounding To prevent receiving electrical shocks in the case of electrical leakage, always ground the copier. q Connect the grounding wire to: The ground terminal of the outlet. A grounding contact which complies with the local electrical standards. q Never connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, the grounding wire for a telephone, or a water pipe.

G-5

4 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE


To ensure that the copier is used in an optimum condition, observe the following precautions. q Never place a heavy object on the copier or subject the copier to shocks. q Insert the power plug all the way into the outlet. q Do not attempt to remove any panel or cover which is secured while the copier is making copies. q Do not turn OFF the Power Switch while the copier is making copies. q Provide good ventilation when making a large number of copies continuously. q Never use flammable sprays near the copier. q If the copier becomes inordinately hot or produces abnormal noise, turn it OFF and unplug it. q Do not turn ON the Power Switch at the same time when you plug the power cord into the outlet. q When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord; hold the plug and pull it out. q Do not bring any magnetized object near the copier. q Do not place a vase or vessel containing water on the copier. q Be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch at the end of the workday or upon power failure. q Use care not to drop paper clips, staples, or other small pieces of metal into the copier. Operating Environment The operating environmental requirements of the copier are as follows. Temperature: 10C to 30C with a fluctuation of 10C per hour Humidity: 15% to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 20% RH per hour Power Requirements The power source voltage requirements are as follows. Voltage Fluctuation: AC115/120/127/200/220/240V 10% (Copying performance assured) 15% (Paper feeding performance assured) Frequency Fluctuation: 50/60 Hz 0.3%

G-6

5 HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES


Before using any consumables, always read the label on its container carefully. q Use the right toner. The applicable copier model name is indicated on the Toner Bottle. q Paper is apt to be easily damaged by dampness. To prevent absorption of moisture, store paper, which has been removed from its wrapper but not loaded into the Drawer, in a sealed plastic bag in a cool, dark place. q Keep consumables out of the reach of children. q Do not touch the PC Drum with bare hands. q Store the paper, toner, and other consumables in a place free from direct sunlight and away from any heating apparatus. q The same sized paper is of two kinds, short grain and long grain. Short grain paper should only be fed through the copier crosswise, long grain paper should only be fed lengthwise. q If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap and water immediately. q Do not throw away any used consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.). They are to be collected. NOTE Do not burn, bury in the ground, or throw into the water any consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.).

G-7

6 SYSTEM OPTIONS
1 2

1139O0010A

1139O0010A

11

10

1138O525AA

1139O0020A

1139O0020A 1136O061AA

6 4

1139O0030A

5
1139O018AA

1136O059AA

1136O059AA

8
1139O1222A

7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Automatic Document Feeder AF-3 Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-7 Data Controller D-102 Duplex Unit AD-5 Paper Feed Cabinet PF2D Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 (Except USA, CANADA) Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 20-Bin Sorter S-205 Staple Sorter ST-206 10-Bin Sorter S-104 Staple Sorter ST-101

1139O1212A

G-8

7 PARTS IDENTIFICATION
x Outside of the Copier Left Door Lock Release Lever Left Door Exit Tray Front Door

Exit Tray Extender

1st/2nd Drawer

Original Cover Control Panel

Power Switch

Manual Bypass Table

Manual Bypass Extender

Right Door Total Counter Right Door Lock Release Lever

G-9

x Inside of the Copier Original Pad

Original Width/Length Scale Toner Bottle

Original Glass

Display Contrast Control Knob

Toner Bottle Holder

Corona Unit Cleaning Lever (Upper/Lower)

Misfeed Removal Knob

Transport Section Release Lever Dehumidifier Switch Misfeed Removal Knob

G-10

8 CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS


8-1. Basic Panel

9 10

Auto Count Manual Steple Mixed Orng. Detect Even Odd


123

1 4

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

# of Origs.

11 12 13
1136P250DA

2in1

7
Sort
1 2 1 2
2in1

Auto

Sort Staple Group

Hole Punch

2in1

Exposure
2 2 2
2in1

Zoom

Paper

Lighter

Darker

x0.5~x2.0
Reduce Full size Enlarge Auto Select

A
Finishing Orig. Copy

14 15

23 22 21 20 19 18 17

16

1 2 3

Clip Tray System Panel Supplementary Panel

A tray in which to put the paper clips used with the documents. See "System Panel" for details. The Supplementary Panel controls are revealed when the System Panel is opened. See "Supplementary Panel" for details. Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panel controls. Lowers the exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode.

4 5 6 7 8 9

System Panel (Door to Supplementary Panel) Exposure Control Key (<, Lighter)

Auto Exposure Mode Key Selects either the Auto or Manual Exposure mode. Exposure Control Key (>, Darker) Display Panel Multi-Copy Keys Raises the exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode. See "Display Panel" for details. [Basic function] * Set the number of copies to be made, access number (of department), and other numeric data. [Users Choice] * Set the auto panel reset time, Energy Saver time, and the maximum number of copies that can be selected. * Set the access number (of the administrator) and User Help code. [Tech. Rep. Mode] * Set the Test Mode operation number, access number (of the administrator), and Tech. Rep. ID. * Set the paper size and other settings.

G-11

10 Access Mode Key (ID Key)

Permits the copier to enter or leave the Administrator mode. The key becomes valid only when "Copy Track" of the Administrator function of the Users Choice has been set to "YES." Sets the copier into the Energy Saver mode. Interrupts a current job with a different one. A second press returns the copier to the previous job. * Clears the number of copies selected. * Clears the counter counts. * Ejects a document, that has previously been fed from the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder onto the Original Glass, out onto the Document Exit Tray.

11 Energy Saver Key 12 Interrupt Key 13 Clear Key

14 Panel Reset Key

* Initializes the copier. * Ejects a document, that has previously been fed from the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder onto the Original Glass, out onto the Document Exit Tray. * Allows the copiers to feed 1-sided copies from the Duplex Unit out onto the Exit Tray.

15 Stop Key

* Stops a multi-copy cycle. * Stops a Test Mode operation. * Sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. or Adjust mode.

16 Start Key

* Starts a copy cycle. * Starts a Test Mode operation. * Sets the copier into the Adjust mode.

17 Paper Select Key 18 Auto Paper Mode Key 19 Enlargement Key 20 Full Size Key 21 Reduction Key 22 Zoom Up/Down Key 23 Message Display

Selects the paper size. Selects the Auto Paper mode. Selects a fixed enlargement ratio. Selects full size (100%). Selects a fixed reduction ratio. Makes the zoom ratio larger or smaller in 0.1% increments, in the range between 50% and 200%. Serves as the basic source of information showing such information as warning messages and copying mode currently selected for use.

G-12

8-2. System Panel 1 2 3

Auto Count Manual Steple Mixed Orng. Detect Even Odd


123

1 4

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

# of Origs.

2in1

7
Sort
1 2 1 2
2in1

Auto

Sort Staple Group

Hole Punch

2in1

Exposure
2 2 2
2in1

Zoom

Paper

Lighter

Darker

x0.5~x2.0
Reduce Full size Enlarge Auto Select

A
Finishing Orig. Copy

1136P251DA

7
1 Manual Staple Key

* Staples copy sets or stacks already made. * Permits the stapling of copies as they are manually placed in the Top or 1st Bin when there are no copies in any of the Bins.

2 3

Mixed Original Detection Mode Key

Sets or cancels the Mixed Original Detection mode.

Original Count Mode Key Selects the appropriate original count mode to determine whether the odd-page correction is necessary. Original>Copy Type Select Key II Original>Copy Type Select Key I Hole Punch Mode Key Selects the type of 2-in-1 copying job to be performed. Selects the type of copying job making 1- or 2-sided copies from 1- or 2-sided originals. Sets the copier into the Hole Punch mode. (Possible only on A3, 11" 17" lengthwise or A4, 8-1/2" 11" crosswise paper. The mode is not acceptable when the copier is in the Mixed Original Detection mode.) Selects the type of exit processing.

4 5 6

Finishing Mode Select Key

G-13

8-3. Supplementary Panel Flipping the System Panel to the left reveals the Supplementary Panel controls. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Job Memory Input

Zoom Memory

Auto Size
123

1 4

2 5 8 0

Meter Count OHP Interleaving Page Insertion Cover (Front) Erase 1

7
Auto

Cover (Front&Back)

Erase 2

Toner

Book

Margin 1

Erase 3

Exposure
Book 2 Margin 2 Erase 4

Zoom

Paper

Lighter

Darker

x0.5~x2.0

A
Drum Dehumidify

Reduce Full size Enlarge


Display

Auto

Select

OK

1136P252CA

15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

14

13

12

11

10

System Panel (Door to Supplementary Panel) Insertion Mode Key Cover Mode Key Meter Count Key Memory Input Key Job Memory Select Key Zoom Memory Select Key Auto Size Mode Key Erase Mode Key

Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panel controls. Sets the copier into the Insertion mode. Sets the copier into the Cover mode. Shows on the Message Display the current counts of different electronic counters of the copier. Stores a copying job program or a zoom ratio in the memory. Recalls a copying job program previously stored in the job memory. Stores a zoom ratio in, or recalls one from, the zoom memory. Selects the Auto Size Mode. Sets the copier into the Erase mode. Validates the selection made by the Select Key. Selects a function from among the options shown on the Message Display. Sets the copier into the File Margin mode. Sets the copier into the Book Copy mode. Removes condensation formed on the surface of the PC Drum. Sets the copier into the Auxiliary Toner Replenishing mode. It does not, however, start the toner replenishing sequence if the toner-to-carrier ratio is above a predetermined level.

10 Enter Key 11 Select Key 12 File Margin Mode Key 13 Book Mode Key 14 Drum Dehumidify Key 15 Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key

G-14

8-4. Display Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

123

Auto

1136P253CA

1136P253CA

14
1 Monitor Display

13

12

11

10

* Shows the paper source which is currently selected for use. * Shows the location of a closure failure. * Shows the location of a paper misfeed.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Misfeed Indicator

Indicates that a paper misfeed has occurred

Call-Tech.-Rep. Indicator Indicates that the copier has developed a malfunction. Maintenance Call Indicator Closure Failure Indicator Add Toner Indicator Wait Indicator Multi-Copy Display Indicates that a PM counter or Copy Kit counter has reached a preset value. Indicates that a Door is left open. Indicates that the Toner Bottle is running out of toner. Indicates that the Fusing Unit is warming up or the Lens/Mirror is in motion. Shows the number of copies set to be made.

Plug-In Counter Indicator Indicates that the Plug-In Counter is unplugged from the copier or a magnetic card removed from the Data Controller. Indicates that the Staple Cartridge is running out of staples. Indicates that the Spent Toner counter has reached a preset value.

10 Add Staple Indicator 11 Toner Collecting Box Full Indicator

12 Remove Copies Indicator Indicates that there is a copy or copies left in any of the Sorter Bins. 13 Add Paper Indicator 14 Exposure Information Display Indicates that the currently selected Drawer has run out of paper. Auto Exposure Indicator Exposure Level Indicator : Indicates that the copier is now in the Auto Exposure mode. : Shows the exposure setting level in the Manual Exposure mode.

G-15

8-5. Users Choice Card 8-5-1. Entering the Users Choice 1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the Users Choice Card shown below on the Supplementary Panel. 2. Hold down the Panel Reset Key more than 3 seconds. 3. This sets the copier into the Users Choice. Now, operate the panel as instructed by the Message Display.
* For details on the Users Choice functions and associated operating

instructions, see the Operators Manual or SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Job Memory Input

Zoom Memory

Auto Size
123

1 4

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

Meter Count OHP Interleaving Page Insertion Cover (Front) Erase 1

7
Auto

Cover (Front&Back)

Erase 2

Toner

Book

Margin 1

Erase 3

Exposure
Book 2 Margin 2 Erase 4

Zoom

Paper

Lighter

Darker

x0.5~x2.0

A
Drum Dehumidify

Reduce Full size Enlarge


Display

Auto

Select

OK

1136P360DA

Users Choice Card

Control Panel

8-5-2. Users Choice Functions


No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Functions Language Select Mixed Orig. Detection Original Thickness Copy Mode Priority Paper Priority Exposure Priority Finishing Priority Auto Expo. Level Manual Expo. Adjust Counter Removal No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Functions Intelligent Sort Energy Saver Auto Panel Reset Drum Dehumidify Special Paper Custom 2-in-1 Custom Book Custom 2-in-1 Separation Administrator

G-16

8-6. Tech. Rep. Card 8-6-1. Entering the Tech. Rep. Mode 1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the Tech. Rep. Card shown below on the Supplementary Panel. 2. Press the Keys " " "0" " " "1", in that order. 3. This sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. mode. Now, operate the panel as instructed by the Message Display.
* For details on the Tech. Rep. mode functions and associated operating

instructions, see SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Tech.Rep. Card - 2
Card - 2 Card - 1
Tech. Rep. ID Code

Tech. Rep. Card - 1


Card - 2 Card - 1
Security Mode

Data Save

Level History

Passage Sensor Control Boad


ROM Varsion

Tech. Rep. Choice ADF Setting

Jam

Paper

Initial Transmission

Data Load

Retry

Port

DT Setting

Call Completion Counter Clear

Port

Panel Indication

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble

Maintenance

Memory

Auto CPU Reset

Consumables

RD Mode

I/O Check
Enter F O P

Counter

MINOLTA CAMERA CO, LTD.

1136P03GCA
1136P04GCA

8-6-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Functions


Tech. Rep. Card 1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Tech. Rep. Choice Paper Size Input System Input Counter ROM Version ADF Setting Security Mode Functions No. 1 2 3 4 RD Mode I/O Check Level History Tech. Rep. ID Code Tech. Rep. Card 2 Functions

G-17

MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL

SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

CONTENTS
GENERAL
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7 6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8 7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9 8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 8-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-11 8-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13 8-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14 8-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15 8-5. Users Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16 8-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1 2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2 3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4 4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5 5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-8 5-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9 6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-13 7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-23 7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24

CONTENTS
8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-25 8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-25 8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-26 8-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27 9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-29 9-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-30 9-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-34 9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-35 9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-35 9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-39 9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44 10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48 10-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-48 10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-49 10-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-50 10-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51 10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53 10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54 11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-57 11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-59 11-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-59 11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-60 11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61 12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62 12-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-62 12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63 12-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-64 12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65

ii

CONTENTS
12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-67 12-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-68 12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-71 12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-72 12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-75 12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77 13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-78 13-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-78 13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-79 13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80 13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-80 13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-81 13-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82 13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-84 13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85 13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-86 13-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-87 13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-88 13-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-90 13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-91 13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-92 13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-93 13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94 14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-96 14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-97 14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98 15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-99 15-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-99 15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-100 15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-101 15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102

iii

CONTENTS
16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS . . . . . . . . M-104 16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-104 16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-105 16-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-106 16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107 17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-109 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-110 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-110 17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111 17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-113 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-113 17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-114 17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115 17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-116 17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-117 18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118 19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-120 19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-121 19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122 20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-123 20-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-123 20-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-124 20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-124 20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-125 20-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-126 20-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127

iv

CONTENTS
21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-131 21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-132 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133 21-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134 22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136 22-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-136 23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-137 24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-141

SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

1 CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 39 38 37 36 35 34 22 23 24 33 32 25 26 27 18 19 20 21

31

30 29

28

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

3rd Mirror 2nd Mirror 1st Mirror Exposure Lamp LA1 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PC119 Lens Main Erase Lamp LA3 Cleaning Blade PC Drum Charge Corona PC Drum Dust-Proof Glass 6th Mirror Image Erase Lamp LA2 Sleeve/Magnet Roller 4th Mirror 5th Mirror Synchronizing Roller Transport Roller

20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.

Manual Bypass Feed Roll Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Multi Bypass Table Manual Bypass Separator Roll Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll Image Transfer Corona Paper Separator Corona Suction Belt Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 Lower Fusing Roller Upper Fusing Roller Fusing Heater Lamp H1 Fusing Paper Separator Finger 1st Paper Exit Roller 2nd Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Guide Oil Roller

M-1

2 COPY PROCESS
2 3 4 10 9 1 5

13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PC DRUM DRUM CHARGING IMAGE ERASE EXPOSURE DEVELOPING PAPER FEEDING IMAGE TRANSFER

12

11

MANUAL BYPASS TABLE

8. PAPER SEPARATION 9. CLEANING 10. MAIN ERASE 11. TRANSPORT 12. FUSING 13. PAPER EXIT

1. PC Drum
The PC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with a photosensitive semiconductor. It is used as the medium on which a visible developed image of the original is formed. (For more details, see p. M-23.)

2. Drum Charging
The PC Drum Charge Corona Unit is equipped with a single wire and a Scorotron Grid to deposit a uniform negative charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum. (For more details, see p. M-25.)

3. Image Erase
Any areas of charge which are not to be developed are neutralized by lighting up LEDs. (For more details, see p. M-55.)

4. Exposure
Light from the Exposure Lamp reflected off the original is guided to the surface of the PC Drum and reduces the level of the negative charges, thereby forming an electrostatic latent image. (For more details, see p. M-29.)

5. Developing
Toner positively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image changing it to a visible, developed image. A DC negative bias voltage is applied to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller to prevent toner from being attracted onto those areas of the PC Drum which correspond to the background areas of the original. (For more details, see p. M-62.)

M-2

6. Paper Feeding
Paper is fed either automatically from the 1st or 2nd Drawer, or manually via the Manual Bypass Table (capacity 50 sheets of paper). Each Drawer has fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest at take-up. The Manual Bypass Table has a Separator Roll that functions to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest at take-up. (For more details, see p. M-78.)

7. Image Transfer
The single-wire Image Transfer Corona Unit applies a DC negative corona emission to the underside of the paper, thereby attracting toner onto the surface of the paper. (For more details, see p. M-104.)

8. Paper Separation
The single-wire Paper Separator Corona Unit applies an AC corona emission to the underside of the paper to neutralize the paper. In addition, mechanical paper separation is provided by the two PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the Imaging Unit. (For more details, see p. M-104.)

9. Cleaning
Residual toner on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade. (For more details, see p. M-108.)

10. Main Erase


Light from the Main Erase Lamp neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the PC Drum after cleaning. (For more details, see p. M-118.)

11. Transport
The paper is fed to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts. (For more details, see p. M-120.)

12. Fusing
The developed image is permanently fused to the paper by a combination of heat and pressure applied by the Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers. (For more details, see p. M-123.)

13. Paper Exit


After the fusing process the paper is fed out by the Paper Exit Roller onto the Exit Tray. (For more details, see p. M-131.)

M-3

3 DRIVE SYSTEM
The Main Drive Motor provides drive for the entire mechanism of the copier. To help minimize operating noise, timing belts and plastic gears are used in large numbers for the drive train parts.
2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear Cleaning Roller Drive Gear

Suction Unit Drive Gear PC Drum Drive Gear Developing Section Drive Gear Manual Bypass Take-Up Clutch Gear 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Drive Gear Upper Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear Main Drive Motor Gear Synchronizing Roller Clutch Gear Transport Roller Clutch Gear 1st Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear

Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear (on PC Unit)

1136M002AA

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Drive Gear Lower Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear

M-4

4 SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION
A The power cord is plugged into the outlet.

ON ON ON

DC Power Supply Unit PU1 outputs DC24V for Dehumidifying heating. Drum Dehumidifying Only when Drum Heater H3 Dehumidifying Switch S3 and Paper Dehumidifying Paper Dehumidifying Switch Heater H2 S12 are ON

B Power Switch S1 is turned ON.

OFF ON ON

H2, H3 PU1 outputs DC24V and DC5V. Power Supply Board PWB-C outputs DC24V. (DC24V line: ON) Master Board PWB-A outputs DC4.7V and DC12V.

ON ON ON

Control panel display Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at half speed. ON Fusing Heater Lamp H1

Approx. 1 sec.

The Lens is detected at the home position. The Mirror is detected at the home position. The Scanner makes its initial motion. The Lens is detected at the full size position. The Mirror is detected at the full size position. For details, see OPTICAL SECTION.

The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller reaches 175C. ON ON


*1

Main Drive Motor M1 and Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 start predrive. M4 turns at full speed. Developing Bias / Paper Separator Corona ON Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON Approx. PC Drum Charge 200 msec. Corona / Image Transfer Corona ON Main Erase Lamp LA3

ON

Approx. 100 msec.

To on next page

M-5

After the lapse of 30 sec. or 15 sec. OFF


* 30 sec. if the Upper Fusing Roller

surface temperature is less than 165C when S1 is turned ON and 15 sec. if the surface temperature is 165C or higher. PC Drum Charge Corona / Image Transfer Corona OFF LA2

Approx. 50 msec.

Approx. 290 msec.


*2

Approx. 410 msec.

OFF

M1 / M5 LA3 Approx. 150 msec. OFF Developing Bias / Paper Separator Corona

Approx. 5 sec.
C

M4 turns at half speed.

The Start Key is pressed. (A4 crosswise paper fed from 1st Drawer, full size, single copy cycle)

The components are energized in order of *1 on the preceding page. ON LA3 Approx. 210 msec. ON ON ON Exposure Lamp LA1

Paper Transport Clutch CL1 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 Approx. 100 msec. SL2

Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 is blocked ( L ). Approx. 110 msec. OFF CL1

D PWB-A outputs a LOW SCAN signal to SCP Board PWB-J.

The Scanner initiates a scan motion. A LOW Image Leading Edge signal is input to PWB-A. ON LA2 Approx. 140 msec. OFF LA2 ... Leading edge erase

M-6

E PWB-J outputs a LOW TRON signal to PWB-A.

ON ON

CL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 ON Separator Solenoid SL1 ON SL1

Approx. 395 msec.

Approx. 265 msec.


F PWB-J outputs a LOW SCEND signal to PWB-A.

Approx. 200 msec. SCAN signal: H ... The Scanner stops and starts a return motion. OFF Approx. 243 msec. LA1
The trailing edge of the paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54 (unblocked: H ).

Approx. 5 msec.

OFF

CL1

The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 (unblocked: H ).

Approx. 210 msec.


I

OFF

CL2

The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Exit Switch S53 (ON: H ).

The components are deenergized in order of *2 on the preceding page.

M-7

5 WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION


5-1. Overview The watchdog function monitors whether any of the CPUs mounted in the copier overrun. If this function detects that a CPU overruns, the copier automatically resets the CPU, thereby restarting the logic circuit and mechanism. Even if a copier CPU operates erratically due to electrical noise, therefore, the copier is able to recover from the faulty condition so that the number of visits made by the Technical Representative for CPU overrun can be minimized. 5-2. Configuration The copier has three printed-circuit boards each on which a CPU is mounted:
* SCP (Scanner Control Processor) Board PWB-J that controls the optical

system;
* MSC (Macro System Controller) Board PWB-B that controls the control

panel and system; and,


* Master Board PWB-A which controls the copier, Paper Feed Cabinet and

Duplex Unit. In addition to these, each of the control boards for the Data Controller, Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeders, and Sorter/Staple Sorter is equipped with a CPU. The watchdog functions are summarized as follows: * Each of the copier CPUs monitors whether or not it overruns. * The PWB-B monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder and Data Controller. * The PWB-A monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the Sorter and Staple Sorter. * The control boards for the Paper Feed Cabinet and Duplex Unit do not have a CPU in them. Instead, the PWB-A in the copier controls their operations.
Duplexing/ Automatic Document Feeder Control Board (PWB-A)

Data Controller Control Board

Copier SCP Board PWB-J Sorter, Staple Sorter MSC Board PWB-B Control Board (PWB-A) Master Board PWB-A Paper Feed Cabinet, Duplex Unit

= Board on which a CPU is mounted

M-8

5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing The following processing is performed if a faulty condition is detected in the CPU. The Watchdog Counter available from the Tech. Rep. mode allows the Technical Representative to check if any faulty conditions has occurred in the CPU. For details, see SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Faulty CPU Copier

Processing (in Standby) 1 : The CPU is automatically reset (i.e., shutting down power to all CPUs including those on the options) as soon as a faulty CPU is detected.

Processing (during Copy Cycle) 1: Same as 1 on the left. 2: Since the paper is left inside the copier, the copier detects a misfed sheet of paper or two when power is turned ON again. If the MSC CPU is faulty, however, all paper in line for the exit will be ejected and all paper headed to the duplex will be stored, before restarting the CPU. 1 : Same as 1, 2, and 3 on the left. 2 : The paper take-up sequence is stopped. 3 : All sheets of paper being fed through the copier are fed out of the copier. 4 : Same as 4, 5, and 6 on the left.

Sorter, Staple Sorter

1 : When the CPU malfunctions, the communication to Master Board PWB-A of the copier is cut off or faulty data is transmitted to the PWB-A. 2 : The PWB-A detects that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter is faulty. 3 : The PWB-A notifies MSC Board PWB-B that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter is faulty. 4 : As commanded by the PWB-B, Option Relay RY4C is turned OFF and ON to restart the option. 5 : The communication line from the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter to PWB-A is recovered. 6 : PWB-A notifies PWB-B that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter has recovered from the faulty condition.

M-9

Faulty CPU Other than above

Processing (in Standby) 1 : When the CPU malfunctions, the communication to MSC Board PWB-B of the copier is cut off or faulty data is transmitted to the PWB-B. 2 : PWB-B detects that the CPU malfunctions. 3 : As commanded by the PWB-B, Option Relay RY4C is turned OFF and ON to restart the option. 4 : The communication line from the CPU to PWB-B is recovered. 5 : PWB-B detects that the CPU has recovered from the faulty condition.

Processing (during Copy Cycle) 1 : Same as 1 and 2 on the left. 2 : The paper take-up sequence is stopped. 3 : All sheets of paper being fed through the copier are fed out of the copier. 4 : Same as 3, 4, and 5 on the left.

M-10

6 IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM


6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System .
x The following image stabilization controls are provided to ensure

stabilized copy image.


Quality FF or F5 Operation Purpose Control After making the variation adjustment and contamination correction for the AIDC Sensor, the copier produces a solid-black and halftone pattern and, through AIDC Sensor control, sets the initial values for the grid voltage and optimum Exposure Lamp voltage. After making the AIDC Sensor contamination correction, the copier produces a solid-black pattern and, through AIDC Sensor control, corrects the grid voltage. After making the AIDC Sensor contamination correction, the copier produces a halftone pattern and, through AIDC Sensor control, corrects the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage. The copier provides toner replenishing control through ATDC Sensor control.

Image density, To make an initial gradation adjustment of grid voltage (V0) and optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.

Regular Correction

Image density

To compensate for any drop in image density due to a deteriorating PC Drum.

Gradation

To compensate for any drop in the intensity of LA1 light due to a contaminated optical system.

Foggy background

To keep a given toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer in the Developer Mixing Chamber.

Image density, One-Shot Correction gradation (When the Power Switch is turned ON)

To compensate for After making the AIDC Sensor any drop in surface contamination correction, the potential of the PC copier produces a solid-black Drum upon and halftone pattern and, power-up in the through AIDC Sensor control, morning. corrects the grid voltage and optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.

M-11

x The following is the block diagram of the image stabilization system. Exposure Lamp LA1 Original Width Scale Original Glass

Halftone Patch
PU2 (PWB-H) EE

PWB-A

Image Erase Lamp LA2

Toner Replenishing
HV1

CPU

(UN3)

(UN4) ATDC

AIDC

M-12

6-2. AIDC Sensor Control


There are five processes performed as the AIDC Sensor control: AIDC Sensor variation adjustment AIDC Sensor contamination correction Grid voltage (VG) correction Optimum Exposure Lamp voltage correction (Exposure correction) AE Sensor gain adjustment

x Control of Each Process

[1] AIDC Sensor Variation Adjustment This adjustment is made since the regular current control cannot cover part-to-part variations in the AIDC Sensor (installation, circuit, deterioration, etc.). [Control] The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the PC Drum.
The 4-bit analog switch selects the load resistance. The output current from the AIDC Sensor goes through the load resistance

selected in step (2) and the resultant voltage is applied to Master Board PWB-A.
The load resistance is switched so that the above voltage becomes 1 V or

less, at which time, the analog switch setting is fixed.

M-13

[2] AIDC Sensor Contamination Correction If the Sensor is dirty with toner, it results in an error being produced in the AIDC Sensor output value. The intensity of the AIDC Sensor LED light is therefore varied. [Control] The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the PC Drum.
The output voltage from the AIDC Sensor is applied to Master Board

PWB-A.
The current that flows through the AIDC Sensor LED is varied so that the

above output voltage becomes 1V. When 1V is obtained, the pulse signal is fixed.

1136C01M

M-14

[3] Grid Voltage (VG) Correction The following five different types of controls are provided for VG correction. The Machine checks the T/C Ratio before the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4). In case of the detected T/C Ratio is within the Level (1) Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4) will not run. 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) 2% Max. 7% (1) The grid voltage is adjusted at the initial setup or when the PC Drum has been replaced with a new one. [Control] Master Board PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain a grid voltage of 550 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the Drum Counter has been cleared.
With Exposure Lamp LA1 turned OFF, Image Erase Lamp LA2 is kept

OFF for a given period of time to produce a solid-black pattern.


The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage becomes 4.2 V or

more, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG. (2) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surface potential of a deteriorating PC Drum. [Control] Whenever the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned exceeds the level equivalent to 400 copies, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cycle for the above event.
With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to

produce a solid-black pattern.


The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage falls within the

range between 4.2 V and 4.4 V, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG . (3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surface potential of a cold PC Drum immediately after the copier is turned ON in the morning. [Control]
During predrive after the Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A

outputs a pulse signal for the voltage corrected last.


With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to

produce a solid-black pattern.


The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage becomes 4.2 V or

more, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG.

M-15

(4) The one-shot correction is canceled as the inside temperature of the copier rises. [Control] Upon completion of the copy cycle for every 100 copies made after the Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the corrected voltage before one-shot correction.
With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to

produce a solid-black pattern.


The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. These operations are repeated at every 100 copies made until the

above voltage becomes 4.2 V or more. If, however, 600 or more copies are made or a standby period of 120 minutes or more elapses after the Power Switch has been turned ON, the one-shot correction is canceled. (5) A correction is made by increasing the grid voltage by 30 V each time the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned exceeds 2,800 minutes if the copier has previously determined that the AIDC Sensor is faulty.

1136C02M

M-16

[4] Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage Correction (Exposure Correction) The following five different types of controls are provided for the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage correction. The Machine checks the T/C Ratio before the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4). In case of the detected T/C Ratio is within the Level (1) Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4) will not run. 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) 2% Max. 7% (1) The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is adjusted at the initial setup or when the PC Drum has been replaced with a new one. [Control] PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain an optimum Exposure Lamp voltage of 58 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the Drum Counter has been cleared.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the

Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the difference

between the above voltage and the target median. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.) (2) The correction is made when the F5 test operation is run after the Exposure Lamp has been cleaned or the SCH-70 (Exposure Lamp voltage adjustment) setting changed. [Control] When the second or subsequent F5 test operation is run, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the last exposure correction.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the

Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the difference

between the above voltage and the target median. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)

M-17

(3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the reduced intensity of LA1 light occurring due to a contaminated optical system. [Control] Whenever the cumulative time over which the copier has run exceeds the level equivalent to 5 K copies, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cycle for the above event.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the

Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fall

within the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.) (4) A correction is made for the intensity of LA1 light equivalent to the changes made in VG by one-shot correction. [Control]
After VG has been corrected in one-shot correction, PWB-A outputs a

pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the last exposure correction.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the

Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fall

within the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)

M-18

(5) When the copier has found that the AIDC Sensor is faulty, the intensity of LA1 light is increased by 1V each time the time over which the copier has run exceeds 700 minutes. The intensity of LA1 light is also varied in proportion to the changes made in grid voltage varied according to the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned.

1136C03M

M-19

[5] AE Sensor Gain Adjustment The following two different types of controls are provided for the AE Sensor gain adjustment. (1) The AE Sensor gain is adjusted when the F5 or FF test operation is run. [Control] When the F5 or FF test operation is run, the Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate a blank sheet of paper placed on the Original Glass with an optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The AE Sensor gain is varied so that the above voltage becomes 1.8 V

0.05, thereby setting the pulse signal for the gain.

The Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the

back of the Original Width Scale with the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A and stored in

memory. (2) The AE Sensor gain is corrected as necessary according to the Exposure Lamp voltage changed as a result of "exposure correction." [Control] After the "exposure correction" has been made, the Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the Original Width Scale with the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The AE Sensor gain is adjusted so that the above voltage becomes the

voltage value stored in memory when F5 was run.

M-20

x Control Processing Timing

: AIDC Sensor variation adjustment : AIDC Sensor contamination correction : VG correction : Exposure correction : AE Sensor gain adjustment
Condition Timing

O: Performed : Not performed


Processing

At the initial setup, or when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the PC Drum has been When F5 or replaced. FF test The second or operation is subsequent F5 test run (Initial operation is run setting) when the SCH-70 (Exposure Lamp voltage adjustment) setting is changed or the Exposure Lamp cleaned. The cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned reaches a level equivalent to 400 copies. The cumulative time over which the copier has run reaches a level equivalent to 5 K copies.

Regular correction

If further correction is necessary after If further correction is necessary after

If VG has been varied by

If the exposure level has been varied by

If the exposure level has been varied by

When the Power Switch is turned ON

If further During predrive after correction the Power Switch is has been turned ON necessary (one-shot correction). after If further The copier has made correction 100 copies after the is Power Switch has necessary been turned ON. after

If VG has been varied by

If the exposure level has been varied by

M-21

O: Performed : Not performed


Processing Condition Timing The grid voltage is increased by 30 V each time the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned reaches 2,800 minutes. The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is increased by 1 V each time the cumulative time over which the copier has run reaches 700 minutes.

When the AIDC Sensor is faulty

1: VG is corrected, not by the AIDC Sensor, but according to the time over which the PC Drum has turned. 2: If VG has been corrected by 1, the corresponding exposure level is also changed. 3: The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is corrected, not by the AIDC Sensor, but according to the time over which the copier has run.

M-22

7 PC DRUM
7-1. PC Drum
* The photoconductive drum used in this copier is the organic

photoconductor (OPC) type.


* The drum is made up of two distinct, semiconductive materials on an

aluminum alloy base. The outer of the two layers is called the Charge Transport Layer (CTL), while the inner layer is called the Charge Generating Layer (CGL). * The PC Drum measures 80 mm 350 mm. Handling Precautions This photoconductor exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to light over an extended period of time. It must therefore be protected from light by a clean, soft cloth whenever the PC Unit has been removed from the copier. Further, use utmost care when handling the PC Drum to prevent it from being contaminated.
PC Drum PC Drum Cross-Sectional View CTL CGL Aluminum Cylinder

7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum


* When the PC Unit is slid into the copier, the Coupling Gear, driven by a

timing belt and gear from Main Drive Motor M1, is engaged with the flange of the PC Drum. This connects the drive train for the PC Drum. * The PC Drum is grounded to the frame of the copier through the Ground Point inside the rear of the PC Drum and the Drum Holding Shaft. When the PC Unit is slid into the copier, the Drum Holding Shaft contacts the Ground Point inside the PC Drum. This provides for assured grounding of the PC Drum. Conductive grease has been applied to the Ground Point.
Drum Holding Shaft

Conductive Grease

Ground Point

Ground Plate Drive Gear

Coupling Gear

M-23

7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater


Drum Dehumidifying Heater H3 is located under the Lower Synchronizing

Roller. It is a panel heater that prevents condensation from forming on the surface of the PC Drum.
H3 operates when: * The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet. * Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position. * Drum Dehumidifying Switch S3 is in the ON position. Lower Synchronizing Roller

Drum Dehumidifying Heater H3

Drum Dehumidifying Switch S3

1136C05M

M-24

8 DRUM CHARGING
8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona
The PC Drum Charge Corona in this copier is equipped with a Scorotron

Grid which ensures that a DC negative charge is evenly deposited across the entire surface of the PC Drum. The grid voltage applied to the Grid Mesh of the PC Drum Charge Corona is varied to compensate for any drop in V0 which could occur with age or under low temperatures in the morning. This ensures stabilized image quality. (For more details, see "6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM.") The Constant-Voltage Circuit in High Voltage Unit HV1 maintains the grid voltage in the range between DC-550V and DC-850V according to the Grid Control pulse (PWM) output from Master Board PWB-A.
HV1 PC Drum Charge Corona

PWB-A

1136M005AA

Grid Mesh

<How Scorotron Works>


IC Vc HV1

When High Voltage Unit HV1 turns ON, a corona emission from the Corona Wire begins. A grid voltage according to the Grid Control pulse is being applied to the Grid Mesh.

PC

ConstantVoltage Circuit
1136M161AA

IC Vc

HV1

Since there is a potential difference between the Grid Mesh and PC Drum, the negative charges of the corona emission flow through the Grid Mesh to the surface of the PC Drum. This results in the surface being negatively charged. When the potential of the Grid Mesh becomes equal to that of the PC Drum (i.e., when the potential of the PC Drum becomes the grid voltage set by the Grid Control pulse), the negative corona current flows from the Grid Mesh through HV1 to the ground.

ConstantVoltage Circuit PC

M-25

8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona


The PC Drum Charge Corona is turned ON and OFF by the Drum

Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A. The Grid Control pulse signal is output after the Power Switch has been turned ON. <Operation> The Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE signal is output.
Approx. 200 msec. later

Master Board PWB-A The LOW Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A.

The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from High Voltage Unit HV1 is turned ON. Paper Exit Switch S53 is actuated (when the trailing edge of the paper moves past S53).
Approx. 50 msec. later

Master Board PWB-A The HIGH Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A. The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from HV1 is turned OFF.

Image Erase Lamp H (LA2) L Paper Exit Switch ON (S53) OFF PC Drum Charge/Image ON Transfer Coronas OFF
1136T30MCA

Approx. 200msec.

Approx. 50msec.

M-26

1136C06M

8-3. Ozone Filter


Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona is absorbed by the

Ozone Filter, as the air is drawn out of the copier by Suction Fan Motor M4 through the Duct located to the left of the PC Drum Charge Corona.

Suction Fan Motor M4 PC Drum Charge Corona

Ozone Filter

Duct

M-27

9 OPTICAL SECTION
9-1. Construction
As the Scanner is moved by Scanner Motor M2, the light from Exposure

Lamp LA1 is reflected off the original and guided through the six Mirrors onto the surface of the PC Drum to form the electrostatic latent image.
5 7 6 8 2 9

4 3

10 12 15 14 18 16 13 11

17

1. Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 2. Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 3. Scanner 4. Lens 5. Scanner Motor M2 6. Scanner Shaft 7. Mirror Motor M7 8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage 9. 4th Mirror

10. 5th Mirror 11. 6th Mirror 12. Lens Motor M6 13. AE Sensor Board PWB-H 14. Exposure Lamp LA1 15. 1st Mirror 16. 2nd Mirror 17. 3rd Mirror 18. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage

M-28

9-2. Exposing
Book 2 3

Original Glass

4 5 1st Mirror 1. Auxiliary Reflector : 6

The Auxiliary Reflector reflects light onto the areas that Exposure Lamp LA1 cannot illuminate when an original that does not lie flat on the Original Glass (such as a book) is being used. It functions to reduce shadows which would otherwise be transferred to the copy. The intensity of the light emitted by LA1 remains flat. The intensity is slightly attenuated at the very ends, which is corrected by the Intensity Correction Mirrors fitted on the front and rear ends of the Scanner. The four Aperture Plates regulate the amount of LA1 light illuminating the original surface. Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse TF2 becomes electrically open (blows) if the temperature in the area surrounding the Main Reflector exceeds 128C, thus cutting off the circuit to LA1. The Main Reflector ensures that light from LA1 exposes all areas of the original. This copier uses a halogen frost lamp for Exposure Lamp LA1. Its light distribution characteristics keep the intensity of the light remaining flat.

2. Intensity Correction Mirror

3. Aperture Plates 4. Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse TF2

5. Main Reflector 6. Exposure Lamp LA1

: :

M-29

9-3. Exposure Lamp Control


The voltage applied to Exposure Lamp LA1 is controlled by changing the

duty ratio of the pulse width of the Exposure Lamp Control signal (AVR PWM) output from Master Board PWB-A. For possible contamination of the Optical System and to incorporate any correction made in the grid voltage, the copier automatically varies the optimum intensity of the Exposure Lamp light and adjusts AE Sensor gain to ensure stabilized image quality. (See "6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM.")
<To lower the image density, the Lamp voltage is increased>

t H L T

t'

(t<t')

<To raise the image density, the Lamp voltage is reduced.>

t' Duty Ratio (%) = Period T - Pulse Width t Period T

(t>t')

1136T31MCB

(1) Automatic Exposure Control <Overview> The copier is provided with the Auto Exposure mode in which the voltage applied to Exposure Lamp LA1 is automatically increased or decreased as necessary so that copies of consistent quality are produced regardless of whether, for example, the original has a dark background or is a pencil line drawing. AE Sensor Board PWB-H (beside the Lens) measures the intensity of the light reflected off the 3rd Mirror, which results in the black/white ratio of an area of 210 mm (W) 6 mm (L) of the original being measured. As the original is being scanned in the Auto Exposure mode, PWB-H senses the image density of the original (or the intensity of the light reflected) on a real-time basis. In this mode, the copier either increases or decreases the Exposure Lamp voltage according to the difference between the AE Sensor output and reference voltage during the period between when the Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) is output and when LA1 is turned OFF.
Original 3rd Mirror
6mm

Surface of Original
210mm

Scan Direction

Exploded View A Given Distance AE Sensor Board PWB-H AE Sensor Board PWB-H Slit This area corresponds to a 210-mm-wide band across the original.

3rd Mirror

M-30

<Operation> Master Board PWB-A A pulse signal is sent from pin 17 (P50/TA1) of IC1A to light up LA1 for the center manual exposure setting (EXP5). A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signal is output from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A.

Power Supply Unit PU2 The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19 and PU2 sets the Lamp voltage according to that signal.

LA1 turns ON. During the copy cycle, a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) is output and the automatic exposure control begins. AE Sensor Board PWB-H PD1H detects the intensity of the light striking it and PWB-H converts the light intensity to a corresponding voltage value, outputting it via pin 7 of IC1H. (The higher the intensity of the light striking PD1H, the lower the output voltage.)

Master Board PWB-A The analog voltage from PWB-H is input to pin 1 (AN0) of IC1A. PWB-A compares the input voltage with the reference voltage and increases the Lamp voltage if the input voltage is higher than the reference, and decreases it if the input is lower than the reference. This is accomplished by varying the duty ratio of the pulse signal output from pin 17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A.
* The reference voltage value varies depending on the "Auto Expo. Level"

setting of the Users Choice. It also depends on the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage under that setting.
Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage Choice Lighter Normal Darker 1.45 1.80 2.15 1.53 1.80 2.07 1.59 1.80 2.01 (Unit: V) 56V or Less 57V to 63V 64V or More

M-31

(2) Manual Exposure Control When either one of the Exposure Control Keys on the control panel is pressed, it sets the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. In this mode, the copier permits the user to vary the Lamp voltage (i.e. the exposure level) in nine different steps. <Operation> Press the Exposure Control Key as necessary. Master Board PWB-A The exposure level data is sent from the control panel to IC1A via MSC Board PWB-B through MINET communications. The exposure level data is then converted in IC1A to a pulse signal and output from pin 17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A. A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signal is output from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A. Power Supply Unit PU2 The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19. According to this signal, PU2 sets the Lamp voltage (which can be varied in nine steps according to the exposure setting.)

The intensity of the light emitted by Exposure Lamp LA1 becomes greater or smaller accordingly. (3) Exposure Lamp LA1 ON/OFF Control x Exposure Lamp ON Timing Exposure Lamp LA1 is turned ON T msec. after the PC Drum Charge Corona and Image Transfer Corona have been turned ON following the press of the Start Key. The Lamp ON timing varies for each different paper source. During a multi-copy cycle, LA1 is turned ON again approx. 90 msec. after it has been turned OFF. x Exposure Lamp OFF Timing LA1 is turned OFF approx. 243 msec. after the SCEND signal, which is being input to Master Board PWB-A from SCP Board PWB-J, has gone from HIGH to LOW.
1st Copy ON PC Drum Charge Corona/ Image Transfer Corona OFF SCEND Signal H L Tmsec. Approx. 243msec. 2nd Copy

ON Exposure Lamp LA1 OFF Approx. 90msec.


1136T32MCA

M-32

1136C07M

M-33

9-4. Intensity Correction (1) Because of the nature of the Lens, the intensity of the Exposure Lamp light after passing through the Lens tends to be higher at the center and lower towards both ends. To solve this problem, there is a Lens Aperture Cover installed at the back of the Lens. It limits the amount of light at the center to ensure that an even amount of light strikes the surface of the PC Drum.

(2) When a zoom ratio is large, it results in the intensity of light striking the surface of the PC Drum decreasing. To correct the varying intensity of the light striking the surface of the PC Drum in different zoom ratios, the Lamp voltage is increased according to the set zoom ratio in the Manual Exposure mode and a correction is made for the AE Sensor input voltage to increase the Lamp voltage in the Auto Exposure mode.
Manual Exposure Correction Coefficient Lamp Voltage (V) 0.500~0.549 0.550~0.949 0.950~1.099 1.100~1.399 1.400~1.749 1.750~2.000 +2 +1 0 +1 +2 +4 Auto Exposure Correction Coefficient Equivalent Lamp Voltage (V) +2 +1 0 +1 +2 +4

Zoom Range

M-34

9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism


The Scanner and the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage are driven by Scanner Both the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage slide along the Scanner

Motor M2 through the Scanner Drive Cable, gears and timing belt.

Shaft in the rear of the copier. While at the front end, there is a Slide Collar attached to each of the bodies and that Collar slides over the Slide Rail. The speed of the Scanner varies with different zoom ratios (150.0 mm/second in the full size mode). Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 detects the home position of the Scanner. It determines the reference position for the scan motion.
Scanner Motor M2 Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Scanner Rear Scanner Shaft

Collar 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Front

9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control <Overview> A DC servomotor is used for Scanner Motor M2. The pulse width modulation, or PWM, control is employed in which the average voltage is controlled by varying the width of the Scanner drive pulse which is the voltage input to the Motor. A photosensor and a pulse disk are built into M2. Their function is to convert the Motor shaft speed into the corresponding series of pulses. This pulse signal is input to SCP Board PWB-J. PWB-J then calculates the Motor speed using the period of the pulse signal applied to it and controls the Scanner drive pulse which is to be applied to the Motor. This effectively stabilizes the Motor speed. The pulse signal applied to PWB-J is also used to determine the distance over which the Scanner should travel. This distance is represented by the number of pulses corresponding to each paper size and zoom ratio.

M-35

<Scan/Return Switching and Braking of Scanner Motor M2> Scanner Motor M2 is turned forward to move the Scanner in the scan direction, turned backward to move the Scanner in the return direction, or braked by the Motor Forward and Motor Backward signals input from pins 13 and 15 of IC3J on SCP Board PWB-J. Details are as follows.
Motor Forward Signal (Pin 13 of IC3J) Turns Forward Turns Backward Braked (in Scan Motion) Braked (in Return Motion) H L L H Motor Backward Signal (Pin 15 of IC3J) L H H L

The brake control in the return motion is provided as follows, since M2

builds up its speed to the maximum level during the return motion. The Motor Backward signal is first alternated between HIGH and LOW states to reduce the input voltage to M2 to a low level. After M2 is decelerated to a given speed through this operation, the above brake control is performed.
Braking Motor Forward Signal (Pin 13 of IC3J) Motor Backward Signal (Pin 15 of IC3J) Scanner Motor M2 Deceleration Braking

Forward Rotation (Scan)

Backward Rotation (Return)

1136T33MCB

<Scanner Speed Control> The speed of Scanner Motor M2 is controlled by varying the width of the Scanner drive pulse which is output from pin 38 of IC2J on SCP Board PWB-J. (This means that the current flowing through M2 is varied.)
Scanner Drive Pulse (Pin 38 of IC2J) Output Waveform
Period T

High-Speed Rotation
Pulse Width t
1136T34MCA

Period T

Low-Speed Rotation

Pulse Width t'

1136T35MCA

M-36

<Scan/Return Motion>
x These are the signals used during the scan and return motion: ENABLE signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP. Enables the operation of each load of the optical system when LOW and disables the operation of all loads when HIGH. SCAN signal BASE signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP and requests a scan motion when LOW. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and indicates the image leading edge position. Serves also as the reference for setting the scan length. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and controls the start of the Synchronizing Roller when LOW. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and gives an advance notice of the completion of a scan motion when LOW. : Input from Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 to SCP and detects the Scanner at the home position when LOW. Serves also as the reference for a scan motion.

TRON signal SCEND signal SHOME signal

x Here is the timing chart for scan and return motions.


Scan Speed Scanner Motor M2 Scan Return Scan Return

Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 ENABLE Signal

SCAN Signal

BASE Signal 1 TRON Signal 2 SCEND Signal Lens/Mirrors Motion Move Initial Operation Move
1136T48MCA

1 2

: The LOW BASE signal is output after a given distance is traveled after the PC81 output has gone HIGH. : The LOW TRON signal is output after the lapse of a given period of time plus correction [A-4 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment), A-5 (Lens Position Reduction Registration), and A-11 (Lens Position Enlargement Registration) of Adjust Mode] after the BASE signal has gone LOW. : The LOW SCEND signal is output approx. 200 msec. before the Scanning finish.

M-37

1136C08M

M-38

9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control (1) Lens Drive Mechanism The Lens is moved by the Lens Drive Cable to which drive is transmitted from Lens Motor M6. A two-phase stepping motor is used for M6. The Motor is turned forward or backward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thus moving the Lens in either the reduction or enlargement direction. When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input to the Lens Motor. The Motors shaft turns 7.5 per step, which is equivalent to approx. 0.2 mm of linear Lens movement.
Lens

Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90

Lens Motor M6

In this copier, registration for the original is determined at the rear left

corner, while that for the PC Drum is at the front side. For this reason, there is a Lens Position Correction Cam that moves the Lens slantwise. The Lens Moving Plate moves linearly on a shaft, while the Lens Holder is movable on the Lens Moving Plate. The one roll of the Lens Holder is fitted in the groove of the Lens Position Correction Cam via slits in the Lens Moving Plate. This means that the Lens Holder moves along a curved trajectory which is drawn by the Lens Position Correction Cam, though the Lens Moving Plate makes a linear motion.

Lens

Lens Holder

Roll Lens Position Correction Cam

Shaft

Lens Moving Plate

M-39

(2) Lens Reference Position Detection Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 is used to detect the Lens at the reference position when the copier is turned ON. The Lens should be at the reference position when the Sensor output goes from LOW (enlargement side) to HIGH (reduction side). The Lens moves from this position a distance equivalent to the correction [Adjust Mode A-1 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full size position.
x Operation When Power is Turned ON When the Lens is located on the enlargement side (PC90 is LOW)

Lens Motor M6 turns forward to move the Lens in the reduction direction. M6 stops and starts turning backward when the PC90 output goes from
LOW to HIGH.

After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH
to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

M6 stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (The
Lens is now at the home position.)

The Scanner makes the initial motion. After the Scanner has completed the initial motion, M6 starts turning
backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction.

After being driven 100 steps from when the PC90 output goes from
HIGH to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

After being driven 200 steps, M6 stops and starts turning backward. After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH
to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

M6 temporarily stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to
HIGH.
11

M6 starts turning forward again and moves the Lens a distance equivalent to the correction. It then stops. (The Lens is now at the full size position.)

When the Lens is located on the reduction side (PC90 is HIGH)

M6 turns backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction. The subsequent operations are the same as those in to 11 above.

M-40

x Operation When Zoom Ratio is Changed For a reduction ratio

M6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting of Adjust Mode A-1 to move the Lens in the reduction direction.
For an enlargement ratio

M6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting of Adjust Mode A-1 plus 32, to move the Lens in the enlargement direction. M6 is then driven another 32 steps to move the Lens in the reduction direction.

Enlargement Direction Home Position (PC90 LOW) (PC90)

Reduction Direction (PC90 HIGH)

Forward Rotation

1 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 Backward Rotation

Scanner Initial Operation 7

6 8 9 10 11 Full Size Position

1136T37MCB

1136T37MCA

NOTES: To enhance Lens positioning accuracy, the Lens is always brought to the full size position from the enlargement side. This compensates for the error produced by backlash in the drive gears and part-to-part variations in the Lens Moving Plate. The operations from through are performed to check for possible binding of the Lens moving mechanism. (These operations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)

M-41

(3) Lens Motor M6 Control


Lens Motor M6 has four Coils, each being energized or deenergized in a

given sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 of IC5J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction of rotation. When M6 is turned forward (reduction direction), the outputs from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 are in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1. When M6 is turned backward (enlargement direction), the outputs from these pins are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4.

IC5J

Operation Order Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4


L L H H

Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 10

Pin 15
Forward Rotation Backward Rotation

Lens Moving in Reduction Direction. Lens Moving in Enlargement Direction.


1136H48MCA

M-42

1136C09M

M-43

9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control (1) 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism
To ensure that a focused image of the original is reproduced on the

surface of the PC Drum when in an enlargement or reduction mode, the distance between the original and the surface of the PC Drum (conjugation distance) must be greater than that when in the full size mode. To accomplish this, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved in the direction of a greater conjugation distance (+ direction). The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved by the rack gear fitted to the 4th/5th Mirrors Guide Plate, which is in mesh with the pinion gear. Mirror Motor M7 gives drive to this pinion gear. M7 is a two-phase stepping motor. The Motor is turned forward or backward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thus moving the Carriage in the required direction. When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input to M7. The Motors shaft turns 7.5 per step, which is equivalent to approx. 0.09 mm of linear Mirrors Carriage movement.
Pinion Gear

M7

Rack Gear Mirror Motor M7

4th/5th Mirrors Carriage

4th/5th Mirrors Guide Plate

+ Direction Direction Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86

(2) 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Reference Position Detection


Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 detects the home position of the

4th/5th Mirrors Carriage when the power is turned ON.


The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is at the home position when the PC86

output goes from LOW ( side) to HIGH (+ side). The carriage moves from this position a distance equivalent to the correction [Adjust Mode A-2 (Mirror Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full size position.

M-44

x Operation When Power is Turned ON When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the + side (PC86 is HIGH)

After the Lens has been detected at its home position, Mirror Motor M7
turns backward to move the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage in the direction.

M7 stops and starts turning forward when the PC86 output goes from
HIGH to LOW.

M7 stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (The
carriage is now at the home position.)

The Scanner makes the initial motion. After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forward
100 steps before stopping and then starting to turn backward.

After being driven 3 steps from when the PC86 output goes from HIGH to
LOW, M7 stops and starts turning forward.

M7 temporarily stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW to
HIGH.

After the Lens has been detected at the full size position, M7 starts
turning forward again and moves the carriage a distance equivalent to the correction. It then stops. (The carriage is now at the full size position.)
When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the side (PC86 is LOW)

After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forward
to move the carriage in the + direction.

The subsequent operations are the same as those in to above.


x Operation When Zoom Ratio is Changed For the + direction

M7 turns forward the required number of steps before stopping.


For the direction

M7 turns backward the required number of steps plus 3, then turns forward 3 steps before stopping.

M-45

Direction (PC86 Low) Reference Position (PC86)

Direction (PC86 HIGH)

After Lens Has Been Detected at Home Position

1 2 3

Backward Rotation

Forward Rotation

1 3

Scanner Initial Operation

5 6 7 After Lens Has Been Detected at Full Size Position 8 Full Size Position
1136T38MCB

1136T38MCA

NOTES: To enhance positioning accuracy, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is always brought to the full size position from the side. This compensates for the error produced by backlash in the drive gears. The operations from through are performed to check for possible binding of the carriage moving mechanism. (These operations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)

M-46

(3) Mirror Motor M7 Control


Mirror Motor M7 has four Coils, each being energized or deenergized in

a given sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 of IC6J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction of rotation. When M7 is turned forward (+ direction), the outputs from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4. When M7 is turned backward ( direction), the outputs from these pins are in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1.
Operation Order Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
L L H H

IC6J

Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 10

Pin 15
Forward Rotation Backward Rotation

Mirrors Moving in Mirrors Moving in

Direction. Direction.
1136H49MCA

NOTE: See "Lens Motor M6 Control" for circuit diagram (p. M-43).

M-47

10 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM


10-1. Construction
Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Original Glass Cooling Fan Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PC119 (Option) Original Cover Angle Detecting Sensor PC111 Original Cover Angle Detecting Lever

Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC118 (Option) Size Reset Switch S108 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC117 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 PC116

Control Panel

M-48

10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor
The original size detecting sensors determine the distance between the

sensor and the original, which enables the detection of originals with high image density (Original density up to 0.6). All sensors are fixed to the Optical Base Plate, enhancing measuring accuracy. A movable sensor had a problem of false detection due to its position being moved. Each sensor has two LEDs and one photo receiver (PSD). Since the CD (crosswise) sensors (PC115, 119) are installed at a height different from FD (feeding-direction) sensors (PC116, 117, 118), each type has a different setting distance as detailed below. CD sensors: Setting distance 115 mm FD sensors: Setting distance 60 mm CD Sensor
LED1 PSD LED1

FD Sensor
PSD

LED2

LED2

Each sensor has a built-in signal processing circuit that outputs 8-bit serial

data to Original Size Detecting Board UN2.

Regulator PSD

Vcc

Signal Processing Circuit


1

Sensor Drive Signal

Data Output

LED1 LED Drive Signal

LED Selector Signal

GND
1136M153CA

LED2

M-49

10-2-2.Original Detection Method


When the photo receptor receives the reflected light of the two LEDs at an

intensity that exceeds a predetermined level, the detection system determines that an original is placed within the Setting Distance of the Sensor.

Original Original Glass

Light Being Received

Setting Distance

Light Being Emitted

M-50

10-2-3. Sensor Locations


Three original size detecting sensors are located at the following places to

detect originals of various sizes.


Two additional sensors can be optionally installed to cover more original

sizes that can be detected. (Metric Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD1 (PC116), FD2 (PC117) Optional: CD2 (PC119), FD3 (PC118) (Inch Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD2 (PC117) Optional: FD1 (PC116), FD3 (PC118) NOTE: If the optional sensors are installed, set Jumper Connector JP2 on UN2 as illustrated below and run the F7 operation.
FD 2 FD3 (Option) FD 1 Letter C Letter L Legal 11" 17" FLS Width (Inch) Width (Metric)

Length (Inch)

A5L B5L A4L B4L, B5C A3L, A4C CD2 (Option) CD 1 B5C A4C, B5L A4L A5L B4L A3L

Invoice

Legal, Letter L Letter C, 11" 17"

Length (Metric)

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

Original Size Detecting Board UN2 CN 1 JP 1 LED 1 LED 2 JP 2 CN 4 CN 3 CN 2

FD1 is mounted

FD1 is not mounted

Position of JP1

CD2 and FD3 are mounted

CD2 and FD3 are not mounted

Position of JP2

M-51

10-3. Original Size Detection 10-3-1. Size Detection


Original Size Detecting Board UN2 reads the output data provided by the

original size detecting sensors (PC115 to 119). By comparing the data from each sensor with the threshold level, it determines whether there is an original placed on the Original Glass. UN2 then determines the size of the original according to the combination of the data. (Metric Area)
Original Size A3L B4L A4L A5L A4C Letter L: 8-1/2" 11" 11" 17" Legal: 8-1/2" 14" FLS: 8-1/2" 13" Letter C: 11"8-1/2" No Original FD1 FD2 Size Determined LED2 LED1 LED2 by UN2 A3T (A3L) O O O B4T (B4L) O O O A4T (A4L) O O O q A5T (A5L) O q A4Y (A4C) O q q Letter L (Letter L) 11" 17" (A3L) Legal (A4L) FLS (A4L) Letter C (A4C) No Original O O O O O q O O O O q q q O O O q q FD3 CD1 CD2

LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 O(O) O(O) q(q) q(q) q(q) O(q) O(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) O q q q O l O q q O q O O q q O q O q q O q O(O) q(q) q(q) q(q) O(O) q(q) q(O) q(q) q(q) q(O) q(q)

q(q) q(q) O(O) O(q) O(q) O(q) O(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) q(q)

(Inch Area)
FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1 Size Determined LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 Original Size by UN2 11" 17" 11" 17" (11" 17") O(O) O O O(O) O(O) O O q Legal: 8-1/2" 14" Legal (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) O(O) q Letter L: 8-1/2" 11" Letter L (Letter L) O(O) O q q(q) q(q) q q Letter C: 11"8-1/2" Letter C (Letter C) O(O) q q q(q) q(q) O O q FLS: 8-1/2" 13" FLS (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) q(O) q Invoice: q q(q) q(q) q q Invoice (No Original) O(q) q 5-1/2" 8-1/2" No Original No Original q(q) q q q(q) q(q) q q * O: Original Present

q: Original Not Present

* If no optional sensors are mounted, data is processed as indicated in ( )

and the original sizes determined by UN2 are as indicated in ( ).


* UN2 does not use the data provided by LED1 of Original Size Detecting

Sensor FD1 (PC116) and LED2 of CD2 (PC119) for the determination of the original size.
* Any non-standard size is rounded off to the nearest standard size.

M-52

10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing


The copier performs different processing for the detection of the original

size under different copier conditions as follows.


Copier Condition 1 Original Size Detection Processing

The Original Cover is left LEDs of Original Size Detecting Sensors PC115 to open. 119 project light onto the original and the photo receivers of the sensors receive the reflected light to * Original Cover Angle transmit the corresponding data to Original Size Detecting Sensor Detecting Board UN2. PC111 remains deactivated. UN2 determines the original size based on the combination of the output data from the original size detecting sensors. UN2 divides the original size data into two parts and transmits 4-bit parallel data to Master Board PWB-A approx. every 73 msec. PWB-A combines the 4-bit original size data back into 8-bit data and stores it in memory.

The Original Cover is lowered to an angle less than 15. * PC111 is activated. The Original Cover is completely lowered. * The magnets fitted to the Original Cover actuate Size Reset Switch S108.

The original size data is latched when PC111 is activated and the original size is set.

The copier selects the appropriate paper size based on the set original size data and selects the paper source loaded with paper of that size, with the paper size indicated on the control panel (when in the Auto Paper or Size mode). If the copier is unable to find the target paper size, it lights up the Add Paper Indicator. The set original size data and selected paper size are reset.

The Original Cover is raised to an angle less than 15 * S108 is deactuated. * PC111 remains activated. The Original Cover is raised to an angle more than 15. * PC111 is deactivated.

The copier proceeds with the next original size detection sequence.

* If the Start Key is pressed with the Original Cover raised (PC111 is

deactivated and S108 deactuated), UN2 transmits the original size data available when the Start Key is pressed to Master Board PWB-A for the selection of the paper size.

M-53

10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit

1136C11M

M-54

11 IMAGE ERASE LAMP


11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Any areas of charge which are not to be developed along the leading, trailing, front, and rear edges are neutralized by lighting up 40 LEDs of Image Erase Lamp LA2. This effectively prevents non-image areas from being dirtied and economizes on toner consumption.

PC Drum Charge Corona

6th Mirror

6th Mirror Filter

Image Erase Lamp LA2

PC Drum

M-55

11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output Master Board PWB-A outputs 32-bit ON pattern data (DATA) to Image Erase Lamp LA2 to turn ON and OFF particular LEDs of LA2. The ON pattern data is divided into four blocks of data (each 8 bits) output every 5 msec. Signals sent from PWB-A are as follows: DATA: Indicates which LED to turn ON or OFF of LA2. CLK: MODE: STROBE: Synchronizing signal to transmit data serially. Latches the LED ON/OFF data sent from PWB-A. Outputs the latched LED ON/OFF data to turn ON the corresponding LEDs.

11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the image along the leadingedge. The erase time varies depending on whether SCH-20 (Leading Edge Erase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" and on the control panel setting. See Table below.
SCH-20 "Erase" (4 mm) Normal Erase Width Setting Image Erase Width Timer 4 140 File Margin 10 15 20 "Not Erase" Normal File Margin 10 15 20 10 10 15 20 Frame Erase Punch Hole Erase

Function

14

19

24

10

15

20

10

10

15

20

205 240 275 115

180 215 250 180

180 215 250

Unit: Erase width = mm, Timer = msec.

M-56

11-2-3. Edge Erase The 40 LEDs of LA2 are turned ON and OFF as follows according to the zoom ratio or paper size to erase unnecessary charges along both the front and rear edges of the image.

The LEDs are turned ON according to the paper size in the full size mode. In any zoom ratio other than full size, LEDs are turned ON according to the LEDs are turned ON according to the zoom ratio in manual bypass
copying which circumvents paper size detection. The 40 LEDs are classified into 32 groups as follows and they are turned ON or OFF by groups for edge erase.
Group No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LED No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Image Width (mm) 300 292 284 277 267 260 251 244 235 229 220 212 203 194 184 174 Group No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 LED No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2735 36 37 38 39 40 Image Width (mm) 166 158 150 142 153 126 116 107 99 93

paper size or zoom ratio whichever causes more LEDs to light up.

Numbers are assigned to the LEDs so that the front LED is 40, looking at The "image width" refers to the unexposed image area between the LEDs
numbered from 1 to the corresponding opposite ones that are turned ON. the copier from the front.

M-57

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern


Zoom Ratio Paper Width (mm)
~99 100~107 108~116 117~126 127~135 136~142 143~149 150~158 159~166 167~173 174~184 185~195 196~203 204~211 212~220 221~229 230~235 236~244 245~251 252~258 259~267 268~277 278~284 285~292 293~298

LED Group No.


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

~0.449 0.500~0.550 0.551~0.576 0.577~0.610 0.611~0.642 0.643~0.672 0.673~0.698 0.699~0.728 0.729~0.758 0.759~0.776 0.777~0.806 0.807~0.830 0.831~0.854 0.855~0.882 0.883~0.914 0.915~0.938 0.939~0.964 0.965~0.990 0.991~

O = LED that turns ON

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern (Frame Erase, erase width 10 mm)


Paper Width (mm)
~105 106~113 114~121 122~130 131~140 141~149 150~156 157~164 165~172 173~180 181~188 189~198 199~208 209~217 218~225 226~234 235~243 244~249 250~258 259~265 266~272 273~281 282~291 292~298 299~

LED Group No.


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O = LED that turns ON

M-58

11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time after the lapse of a certain time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated a SCEND signal to erase the image along the trailing edge. The erase start timing varies depending on whether SCH-21 (Trailing Edge Erase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" and on the control panel setting. See Table below.
SCH-20 "Erase" (7 mm) Normal Erase Width Setting Image Erase Width Timer 7 290 File Margin 10 15 20 "Not Erase" Normal File Margin 10 15 20 10 10 15 20 Frame Erase Punch Hole Erase

Function

17

22

27

0 335

10

15

20

10 270

10

15

20

225 190 155

270 235 200

270 235 200

Unit: Erase width = mm, Timer = msec.

11-2-5. Center Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a certain time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the image at the center of the paper. The erase start timing varies for different paper sizes and erase widths as shown below. The erase time depends on the erase width. Erase Start Timing
Paper Size Paper Length Erase Start Timing
10mm 15mm 20mm

A4C 210 800 785 770

A4L 297

A3L 420

A5C 149 600 580 565

B4L 364 1315 1300 1280

B5L 257 960 940 925

B5C 182 710 690 675

8.5" 216 820 805 790

11" 279

17" 432

1090 1500 1075 1485 1060 1470

1030 1540 1015 1525 1000 1510

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Erase Start Timing = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

Erase Time
Erase Width 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm Erase Time 45 msec. 80 msec. 115 msec.

M-59

11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase When only a single original is placed on the Original Glass in the 2-in-1 mode (using Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder), the copier erases the area where no originals are present. Different controls are provided depending on whether "Odd" is specified on the control panel for the number of originals to be used. If "Odd" is specified, all LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period of time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the first half page of the last original.
Paper Size Paper Length Erase Time A4C 210 815 A4L 297 A3L 420 A5C 149 610 B4L 364 1330 B5L 257 970 B5C 182 720 8.5" 216 835 11" 279 17" 432

1105 1515

1045 1555

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Timer = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

If "Odd" is not specified, all LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a given period of time after PWB-J has generated a BASE signal to erase the last half page of the first original.
Paper Size Paper Length Timer A4C 210 835 A4L 297 A3L 420 A5C 149 630 B4L 364 1350 B5L 257 990 B5C 182 740 8.5" 216 855 11" 279 17" 432

1125 1535

1065 1575

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Timer = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

M-60

11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit

1136C12M

M-61

12 DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER
12-1. Construction
x Developing Unit This copier employs the New Micro-Toning developing system which

supplies toner from the Developing Unit to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the PC Drum to form a visible, developed toner image of the original. One part of the Magnet Roller provides a very weak magnetic force, which effectively prevents developer from being compacted and clogging at the Doctor Blade.
Bucket Roller Doctor Blade Developer Conveying Screw Toner Mixing Screw

Toner Scattering Prevention Plate

ATDC Sensor Sleeve/Magnet Roller

x Hopper Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit by turning the Toner Bottle to drop

toner down into the Sub Hopper. As Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 turns, toner in the Toner Bottle is fed to the Sub Hopper which, in turn, conveys the toner to the Developing Unit using the drive from Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9.
Toner Bottle Coupling Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Magnet Toner Conveying Screw

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9

M-62

12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism


Drive is transmitted from the copier to the Developing Unit by Coupling Coupling Gear 2 is spring-loaded. If the protruding part of Coupling Gear 1

Gears 1 and 2 when they mesh with each other.

makes contact with that of Coupling Gear 2 when the PC Unit is slid into the copier, spring-loaded Coupling Gear 2 is pushed back toward the rear of the copier allowing the PC Unit to be slid into position. When drive is later transmitted to the Developing Unit, Coupling Gear 2 is pushed to the front by the tension of the spring to mesh positively with Coupling Gear 1. Copier Drive from Main Drive Motor M1 is transmitted via Timing Belt B to Gear A. Gear C is turned by Gear B, causing Coupling Gear 2 to turn clockwise.

Developing Unit As Coupling Gear 1 turns clockwise, the Bucket Roller mounted on the same shaft as Coupling Gear 1 is turned.

Gear D is turned clockwise by an intermediate gear. The Sleeve/Magnet Roller is turned clockwise. The Bucket Roller is turned clockwise.

Gears E and F are turned counterclockwise by intermediate gears. The Developer Conveying and Toner Mixing Screws are turned counterclockwise.

Toner Mixing Screw

Developer Conveying Screw Bucket Roller

Gear F Gear E Gear C Gear B

Sleeve/Magnet Roller Gear D

Coupling Gear 1 Coupling Gear 2 Main Drive Motor M1

Gear A Timing Belt B

M-63

12-3. Developer Flow


The developer and toner flow inside the Developing Unit as the Toner

Mixing Screw, Developer Conveying Screw, Bucket Roller, and Sleeve/Magnet Roller are turned.
Developer Conveying Screw Bucket Roller Sleeve/Magnet Roller

Toner is supplied through the Toner Supply Port from the Sub Hopper. The Toner Mixing Screw agitates the toner, while conveying it from the front to the rear end of the Unit. The Developer Conveying Screw mixes the toner with the developer, conveying them from the rear to the front end. The ATDC Sensor senses the toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer mixed and conveyed by the Developer Conveying Screw. The developer conveyed to the front end of the Unit is then conveyed onto the Bucket Roller. The Bucket Roller agitates and triboelectrically charges the developer, supplying it to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller. Part of the developer fed to the rear end of the Unit by the Bucket Roller is guided back onto the Developer Conveying Screw.

Rear of Copier

ATDC Sensor Toner Mixing Screw

Toner Supply Port Front of Copier

M-64

12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning


The Magnet Roller of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller of this copier has the

following magnetic characteristics. N1


Pole Having Weak Magnetic Force

: The principal magnetic pole having the strongest magnetic flux density. Therefore, when toner is attracted to the latent image, the carrier is firmly held onto the Sleeve Roller.

S1, N2: The height of the developer brush is held low so that the developer can be smoothly recycled. These poles also prevent the developer from scattering. N3
Uncovered Surface Areas of Weak Magnetic Force

: This pole causes the developer bristles on the surface of the Sleeve Roller to stand up straight so that their height will be regulated evenly by the Doctor Blade. : Since the gap between N3 and N1 is wide, this pole ensures that the developer is positively conveyed to the point of development. : This pole provides a very weak magnetic force. If developer is compacted and clogs at the Doctor Blade and, as a result, part of the surfaces of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered with developer, the nearby developer around S2b goes to those uncovered surfaces because of its weak magnetic force. This helps prevent blank lines from occurring on the copy.

S2a
Moving Developer Sleeve/Magnet Roller

S2b

M-65

Since the Developing Unit and PC Drum are housed in the PC Unit in this

copier, the Magnet Roller has been made movable: the Bushing is pressed by compression springs thereby pressing the Positioning Collars on both ends of the Magnet Roller against the PC Drum. This ensures a given distance between the PC Drum and the Sleeve/Magnet Roller.

Movable Bushing

Compression Spring

Fixed Bushing PC Drum Rear of Copier

M-66

12-5. Developing Bias


A negative voltage (Vb = Developing Bias voltage) is applied to the Sleeve

Roller to prevent a foggy background on the copy. The amount of toner attracted onto the surface of the PC Drum depends on how much lower the PC Drum surface potential (Vi) is than Vb (i.e., the potential difference). Because the Magnet Roller of this copier is movable, a flat spring is fitted to the Bias Terminal, allowing the Bias Terminal to follow the movement of the Magnet Roller.

Bias Terminal Sleeve/Magnet Roller Flat Spring

x Here is the control timing chart.

Start Key ON

OFF

Main Drive Motor ON M1 OFF Developing Bias


ON OFF

Approx. 150msec.

1136T33MCA

1136C13M

M-67

12-6. ATDC Sensor


x ATDC Sensor ATDC Sensor UN4 installed on the underside of the Developer Mixing

Chamber detects the varying toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer, which is circulated by the Developer Conveying Screw, as changes in the magnetic flux density. The magnetic flux density is converted to a corresponding voltage value which is applied to the analog port of IC1A on Master Board PWB-A. IC1A compares the ATDC Sensor output voltage with the reference voltage for 6% toner-to-carrier ratio [which can be varied by the ATDC Detection Level Mode (Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-90)] to control toner replenishment.
x ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment/Detection Circuit The sensitivity of the ATDC Sensor is automatically adjusted to the

starter with a 6% T/C when the F8 test operation is run after fresh starter has been loaded.

Pin 1 of IC23A outputs an initial voltage when the F8 operation is started.

The output voltage from the ATDC Sensor is applied to Analog Port AN1 of IC1A. IC1A checks to see whether the voltage input to it is 2.5 V. The voltage is 2.5 V. The voltage is NOT 2.5 V.

The output voltage from pin 1 of IC23A is fixed as the reference voltage.

The ATDC Sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the initial starter T/C (6%).

The output voltage from pin 1 of IC23A is varied. The voltage is decreased if the input voltage is 2.5 V or more. The voltage is increased if the input voltage is less than 2.5 V.

The Sensor output voltage applied to IC1A is compared with the reference voltage (2.5 V SCH-90 setting) and, if it is higher than the reference, Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized.

M-68

1136C14M

Toner-to-Carrier Ratio of Developer 1 Reference Wave 2 Output Wave

6
Reference Voltage ATDC Output Voltage

Low

Normal High

Set T/C 4. 0 % 4. 5 % 5. 0 % 5. 5 % 6. 0 % 6. 5 % 7. 0 % 7. 5 %

Reference Voltage 2. 943 V 2. 825 V 2. 717 V 2. 608 V 2. 500 V 2. 391 V 2. 283 V 2. 174 V

M-69

x ATDC Sensor Control Sequence

The ATDC Sensor reads the toner-to-carrier ratio data at the following
timing to provide the basis for toner replenishing control: The ATDC Sensor takes the reading for a 500-msec. period at 5-msec. intervals 20 msec. after a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) from SCP Board PWB-J has been input to Master Board PWB-A for each copy made.

The mean value of the readings sampled is compared with the voltage
(target value) corresponding to the T/C set by SCH-90 and the result is classified as follows: a) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is higher than the set ratio by 1% or more. b) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is higher than the set ratio by less than 1%. c) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is lower than the set ratio by less than 0.5%. d) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is lower than the set ratio by 0.5% or more.

Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized for a period of


time which depends on the category (a to d) the result of sampling fits into and the paper size being used. a) No toner replenishing takes place.
b) Fixed Amount Replenishing Replenishing Time (msec.) A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11" 17" Legal Letter Invoice 220 110 55 165 85 215 135 105 60 c) Small Amount Replenishing Replenishing Time (msec.) 500 250 125 375 190 485 310 245 120 d) Large Amount Replenishing Replenishing Time (msec.) 2000 1000 500 1500 750 1940 1235 970 485

Paper Size

M-70

12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control


Toner supplied from the Main Hopper is temporarily kept in the Sub Hopper

before being fed to the Developing Unit. This is done to stabilize replenishing of toner and detection of a toner-empty condition. The toner replenishing time (the period of time during which Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is kept energized) is determined according to the ATDC Sensor output level (which varies in three steps). After the ATDC Sensor detection
Toner Empty Detecting Lever From Main Hopper Toner Mixing Lever

Sub Hopper Gear A Gear B Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 Toner Supply Port Rear
1136M031AA

M9 is kept energized for a given period of time. [A LOW Remote signal is output from pin 50 (APA2) of IC4A on PWB-A.] Gear A mounted on the M9 shaft is turned counterclockwise. Gear C is turned counterclockwise via Gear B. The Toner Conveying Screw turns counterclockwise, causing toner to fall into the Toner Supply Port through the Toner Supply Hole. The Toner Mixing Screw then conveys the toner fallen onto it to the rear end of the Developing Unit.

Toner Conveying Screw Toner Supply Hole Front

Gear C

Toner Mixing Screw

1136C15M

M-71

12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control


A toner-empty condition of the Sub Hopper is detected by the magnet fitted

to the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever and Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106. The S106 ON signal is used to energize Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8. <Mechanism> The Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever rides over the eccentric cam installed at the rear end of the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever. When drive from M9 is transmitted to the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever, the Toner Empty Detecting Lever is moved up and down.
When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper remains more than the

predetermined level: Since the Toner Empty Detecting Lever is on the Toner, it does not make an up-and-down motion, keeping S106 deactuated. Hence, the copier does not determine that toner is empty. When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is less than the predetermined level: The Toner Empty Detecting Lever is moved up and down by the eccentric cam, which repeatedly actuates and deactuates S106. When S106 is turned on continuously more than 10 times, the copier determines that toner is empty in the Sub Hopper.

Rear Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever Eccentric Cam Magnet

Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106

Front

M-72

<Control> Toner Empty Detection Control The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequence is carried out while Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 remains energized. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated. Master Board PWB-A A LOW Sub Hopper Toner Empty signal is input to pin 57 (APB1) of IC4A. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized to turn the Toner Bottle one turn, thus replenishing toner from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. A toner-empty condition is detected at the timing at which M9 is next energized. The above operations are repeated and, if the Sub Hopper Toner Empty signal does not go LOW even after the Toner Bottle has been turned ten turns, the Toner Bottle is not turned again. The copier determines that there is a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper, lighting up the Add Toner Indicator on the control panel.
Control After Toner Empty Detection

The Front Door is swung down, Toner Bottle replaced, and the Front Door closed. Master Board PWB-A M8 is energized to turn continuously the Toner Bottle so that toner is supplied from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. M9 is energized once and kept so for approx. 1.7 seconds for every three turns of the Toner Bottle. The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequence is carried out a maximum eight times. As soon as the signal from S106 goes HIGH, M8 is deenergized to stop the Toner Bottle. The Add Toner Indicator on the control panel goes out.

M-73

Toner Empty Detection


ON Sub Hopper Toner Replenshing Motor M9 OFF Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 L T T Toner Bottle Turned 10 Turns T T:Time Over which Toner Bottle is Turned 1 Turn
1136T34MCA

Toner Empty Detection

ON Main Hopper Toner OFF Replenshing Motor M8

After Toner Empty Detection


L Front Door Interlock Switch S21 H

ON Main Drive Motor M1 OFF 3 Times ON Main Hopper Toner Replenshing Motor M9 OFF ON Sub Hopper Toner Replenshing Motor M9 OFF Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 Add Toner Indicator. L H ON OFF
1136T35MCA

3 Times

1136C16M

M-74

12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control


When Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated, it energizes Main

Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 to turn the Toner Bottle one turn, thereby supplying toner from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. <Mechanism> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized. The Home Position Detecting Plate on the M8 shaft is turned and, at the same time, the Coupling is turned. Since the two pins on the Toner Bottle fit into the slots in the Coupling, the Coupling and Toner Bottle are turned together. When the indentation on the Toner Bottle moves past the protrusion on the Toner Bottle Holder, the Toner Bottle is vibrated to prevent some of the toner from remaining unconsumed in the Bottle. Since the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is aligned with the Toner Supply Hole in the Coupling, toner in the Toner Bottle drops down as the Supply Hole becomes located at the bottom.
Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 Toner Bottle

Toner Bottle

Toner Supply Port Toner Supply Hole Toner Bottle Holder Home Position Detecting Plate

Coupling

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8

M-75

<Control> Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 ensures that the Toner Bottle is stopped so that its Toner Supply Port is located at the top. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated. Master Board PWB-A A LOW M8 ON signal is output from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 is unblocked. Master Board PWB-A A HIGH Non-Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A. (This means that M8 has turned.) PC35 is blocked. Master Board PWB-A A LOW Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A. The M8 ON signal from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A goes from LOW to HIGH. M8 is deenergized.

1136C17M

M-76

12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper


To replace an empty Toner Bottle, the user first needs to swing the Toner

Bottle Holder out 40 to the front. There is a flat spring installed on the Sub Hopper Holder, which causes the Toner Bottle Holder to click out of, and into, the locked position. The Holder pivots about the Toner Supply Port as it is swung out or in, which effectively prevents toner from spilling when the Holder is swung out or in. The Coupling is provided with a locking mechanism that prevents the Toner Bottle from turning when it is removed or installed. <When the Toner Bottle Holder is in Position> Since the flat spring fits into the front ^ notch of the Toner Bottle Holder, the Holder is locked in position. At this time, the bottom of the Coupling Lock Lever is pushed in by a part () of the Sub Hopper, keeping the Coupling free.
Flat Spring

Coupling Lock Lever

Front

Rear

Toner Bottle Holder

<When the Toner Bottle Holder is Swung Out> The Toner Bottle Holder pushes the flat spring down and moves over it until the flat spring then fits into the rear ^ notch. This locks the Toner Bottle Holder in position. At this time, the Coupling Lock Lever is free and the spring acts to lock the Coupling in position with the Lock Lever.

Coupling Toner Bottle

Coupling Lock Lever Front

Rear

Flat Spring

M-77

13 PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION


13-1. Construction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11

12 13

14 20 19 18 17 16 15

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1st Drawer

Name

No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Name Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Actuator 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 2nd Drawer Paper Separator Finger 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Spring 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor Actuator 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC102 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Plate 2nd Drawer

1st Drawer Paper Lifting Plate 1st Drawer Paper Lifting Spring 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor Actuator 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC101 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Actuator 1st Drawer Paper Separator Finger

M-78

13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll

Both for the 1st and 2nd Drawers, the Paper Take-Up Roll is semicircular
with the circular part of the Roll turned to the top at times other than take-up. This prevents paper from being caught by the Roll when the Drawer is slid out of the copier. Each drawer has two Paper Take-Up Rolls. The position of the rear Paper Take-Up Roll must be changed according to the size of the paper loaded in the drawer. (For details of Roll positions, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.") The Paper Take-Up Roll is grooved to keep good friction even under heavy loading. A small roll is built into one edge of the take-up Portion of the Roll. It reduces stress otherwise applied to the paper as the Paper Take-Up Roll hits against the paper. Drive for the Paper Take-Up Rolls comes from Main Drive Motor M1 via the timing belt and gear train. The Paper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer: SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) and Spring Clutch control the turning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls.
Turning Direction

Roll

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper Take-Up Roll

Spring Clutch Ratchet

Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Spring

Ratchet

M-79

13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control 13-3-1. Normal Control When the Paper Take-Up Solenoid signal from PWB-A (1st Drawer: pin 11 of PJ12AA; 2nd Drawer: pin 11 of PJ12AB) drops from 24 V to 0 V, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer: SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) is energized to turn the Paper Take-Up Rolls one turn, taking up a sheet of paper from the Drawer. The Paper Take-Up Sensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer: PC57) detects a sheet of paper which has been taken up from the Drawer. Here is the control timing chart. <Feeding 3 Sheets of Paper>
Main Drive Motor M1 Paper Transport Clutch CL1 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC56/57 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Solenoid SL2/3 5msec. 5msec.
1136T36MCB

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

100msec.

100msec.

100msec.

1136C18M

M-80

13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control To minimize occurrence of paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-Up Roll, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if a sheet of paper fails to reach the Paper Take-Up Sensor within 1,325 msec. after the Solenoid has first been energized. (This is called the paper take-up retry function.) A paper misfeed results if a sheet of paper does not reach the Paper Take-Up Sensor even after two paper take-up sequences. Here is the control timing chart.
Approx. 1,325msec. Approx. 1,250msec.

1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take/Up Sensor PC56/57 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take/Up Solenoid SL2/3 Upper/Lower Vertical Transport Roller
1136T37MCA

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Approx. 100msec.

Approx. 100msec.

*2

*2: The copier determines that there is a paper misfeed if the Paper Take-Up Sensor is not activated after the lapse of approx. 1,250 msec. after the paper take-up retry motion.

M-81

13-3-3. Double Feed Control Even if the Paper Take-Up Rolls take up two sheets of paper at one time, the double feed control uses the second sheet of paper for the next copy cycle without causing a paper misfeed. It eliminates a paper misfeed that would otherwise result when two sheets of paper are taken up at once. If the second sheet of paper is stationary, keeping the Paper Take-Up Sensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer: PC57) activated, when the trailing edge of the first sheet of paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54, the copier determines that it is a double feed condition and provides double feed control. If, however, the second sheet of paper has reached the Vertical Transport Roller (paper feeding from the 1st Drawer: Upper; paper feeding from the 2nd Drawer: Lower), the double feed control is not provided since the paper is fed further into the copier by the Vertical Transport Roller. This could result in a paper misfeed or the second sheet of paper being fed through the copier with the first one. If double feed control is provided, it results in the paper take-up interval timer becoming longer. That means longer intervals between two successive paper take-up motions, resulting in a decreased cpm (productivity).
Paper Path (Leading Edge Position of 2nd Sheet of Paper) Transport Roller Sensor Detection Point Transport Roller Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Detection Point Double Feed Control (Not Provided) (Provided) Paper Feeding from 1st Drawer

Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Detection Point

(Not Provided) (Provided)

Paper Feeding from 2nd Drawer

Here is the control timing chart.


Paper Take-Up Interval Timer When Double Feed 600msec. Control is Provided ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1136T38MCA

1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up clutch SL2/3 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56/57 Transport Roller Seneor PC54

M-82

13-4. Paper Drawer 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer Each of the two paper drawers (1st and 2nd Drawers) can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. It is a fixed paper size type and the following steps must be performed when changing the paper size. 1. Change the positions of Edge Guides I and II and the Trailing Edge Stop. 2. Change the type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs under the Paper Lifting Plate. (1, 3) 3. Change the position of the Paper Take-Up Roll in the rear. (1) 4. Enter the new paper size using the Paper Size Input mode under the Tech. Rep. mode. (2)

1: For the detailed job steps, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT." 2: For the detailed job steps, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs." 3: The type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs are changed to
ensure better paper separation and prevent the Paper Lifting Plate from flexing, thus eliminating the possibility of changing paper take-up pressure.
Edge Guide II Edge Guide I Paper Lifting Plate

Trailing Edge Stop

Paper Lifting Springs

M-83

13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer The drawer is positioned when its ribs fit into the slots in the rail located on the paper take-up end of the copier. See the illustration below. The drawer is locked into position when the magnet mounted in the Magnet Mounting Bracket is attracted by the metal plate fitted to the copier frame. The drawer reference position is adjusted by moving the Magnet Mounting Bracket to the front or rear. For details, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT."

Paper Drawer

Rail on Copier

Drawer Front Cover

Copier Frame Magnet Metal Plate

Magnet Mounting Bracket

Drawer Front Cover

M-84

13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection When the drawer is slid into the copier, the flap of the Magnet Mounting Bracket blocks the Drawer Set Sensor (1st Drawer: PC61; 2nd Drawer: PC62) mounted on the metal plate that attracts the magnet. Then, the copier determines that the drawer has been slid into position.
Magnet Mounting Bracket Drawer Set Sensor

Metal Plate

Drawer Front Cover

1136C19M

M-85

13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism Each drawer has Fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest of the paper stack at paper take-up. The Fingers are fitted to the right front and rear corners of the drawer. When the Paper Take-Up Rolls start turning to take up the top sheet of paper, their turning force is directly transmitted to the top sheet of paper as it is in direct contact with the Paper Take-Up Rolls. That force overcomes the block of the Fingers, causing the top sheet of paper to ride over the Fingers and be fed out of the drawer into the copier. As to the second sheet of paper, the paper transport force obtained through friction with the top sheet of paper is weak and does not allow the second sheet of paper to ride over the block of the Fingers. Hence, the second sheet of paper remains stationary with the rest of the paper stack in the drawer. When there are two sheets of paper left in the drawer, the bottom sheet can be fed with the top one if the friction of the Paper Lifting Plate is weak. The Friction Plate affixed to the Paper Lifting Plate prevents this from happening.

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper

Separator Finger

Friction Plate

Paper Lifting Plate

M-86

13-6. Paper Empty Detection When the drawer runs out of paper, the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor drops into the cutout in the Paper Lifting Plate. This activates the Paper Empty Sensor and the copier will know that the drawer has run out of paper. The Paper Lifting Plate is raised at all times by the Paper Lifting Springs. To prevent the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor (1st Drawer: PC101; 2nd Drawer: PC102) from being caught by the paper stack when the drawer is slid out of the copier, therefore, it is tilted slightly. This, however, results in the operating stroke of the Actuator becoming small, which increases the possibility of the Actuator activating the Sensor by the flexing of a sheet of paper as it is taken up and fed in. To prevent this false detection of a paper-empty condition, the paper empty detection is enabled only when the Paper Take-Up Rolls are in the retracted position.

Paper Empty Sensor

Actuator

1136C20M

M-87

13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2 is mounted on the copier base frame under the 2nd Drawer. It prevents the paper in the drawer from growing damp in highly humid weather. It works when the following conditions are met: The power cord is plugged in the power outlet. Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position. Paper Dehumidifying Switch S12 is in the ON position.
Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2

Copier Base Frame

Paper Dehumidifying Switch S12

1136C21M

M-88

13-8. Manual Bypass Table 13-8-1. Construction The Manual Bypass Table is fitted to the Right Door of the copier, integrated into the copier. It is constructed as follows.

Right Cover Lever Right Door Cover Paper Empty Sensor Manual Bypass Table

Paper Take-Up Clutch Paper Stoppers Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

Upper Transport Roller Manual Bypass Feed

Paper Empty Sensor Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

Manual Bypass Table Paper Empty Sensor Actuator Paper Stopper Manual Bypass Separator Roll

Lower Transport Roller

M-89

13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism The Paper Take-Up Rolls are normally in their raised (retracted) position so that they will not hamper proper loading of paper. When the Start Key is pressed, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 is deenergized causing the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls to press the paper stack downward and take up a sheet of paper. There are the Paper Stoppers provided that block the leading edge of the paper stack as it is loaded on the Table, preventing any portion of the leading edge of the paper from getting inside. These Stoppers are unlocked at paper take-up, allowing paper into the copier.
(In Standby) Lock Levers Lever Rack Gear Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4

Paper Stoppers

(At Take-Up)

M-90

13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism Drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table as follows. The gear mounted on the Lower Transport Roller shaft is turned by the drive from Main Drive Motor M1. ... (1) The drive is transmitted to the idle gear mounted to the copier frame. ... (2) When the Right Door is closed, the idle gear on the Multi Bypass Table meshes with gear (2) and drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table. ... (3) Drive is transmitted to the gear on Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3. ... (4) The Manual Bypass Feed Roll mounted on the same shaft as CL3 is turned. Drive is then transmitted via the gear on the same shaft as the Manual Bypass Feed Roll and idle gear to the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls. ... (5)

The gears in the following illustration are keyed to the description of the
operations given above.

(1) (2) (3)

Manual Bypass Feed Roll (5)

Manual Feed Paper Take-Up (4)

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

M-91

13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control The Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls are pressed against, and released from, the paper stack and the Manual Bypass Take-Up/Feed Rolls are turned by operating the clutches and solenoids with the signals from Master Board PWB-A. See the circuit diagram below. Operation timing is as follows.
TRON for 1st Sheet of Paper Main Drive Motor M1 Manual Feed Paper 500msec. Take-Up Solenoid SL4 Down Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 UP Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch SL3 Paper Transport Clutch SL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 25msec.
500msec.

TRON for 2nd Sheet of Paper OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 25msec. OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1136T39MCB

500msec.

500msec.

5msec.

25msec. 145msec.

25msec. 145msec.

5msec. 250msec. 250msec.

1136C22M

M-92

13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paper is fed in by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one. This is accomplished by the Torque Limiter fitted to the Separator Roll shaft which stops the Separator Roll when there is a change in friction between the Feed and Separator Rolls. 1. At the Time of Double Feed: The top sheet of paper is fed into the copier by the Feed Roll. Since the coefficient of friction between the top and second sheets of paper is smaller than that between the second sheet of paper and the Separator Roll, the two sheets of paper slip and the second sheet of paper is not fed into the copier. The driving force of the Feed Roll is at this time neutralized by the two slipping sheets of paper and not transmitted to the Separator Roll which is stopped by its Torque Limiter. In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is greater than the driving force of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the two sheets of paper.

Feed Roll

Separator Roll * Stationary in this condition.

2. Normal Feeding: The friction coefficient on the top side of the paper is equivalent to that on the underside. Hence, the driving force of the Feed Roll is directly transmitted to the Separator Roll through the paper, causing the Separator Roll to be turned by the Feed Roll. In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is smaller than the driving force of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the paper.

M-93

13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection The Manual Bypass Table is equipped with Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51 which detects a sheet of paper on the Multi Bypass Table. Since PC51 is used to determine that a paper stack is placed in position on the Manual Bypass Table, it is activated when the leading edge of the paper stack is pressed against the Paper Stoppers.

Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Paper Stopper Actuator

1136C23M

M-94

14 VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT


14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section
Upper Transport Roller Lower Transport Roller Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22

Right Upper Door Set Sensor PC40

Transport Roller Sensor PC54

Upper Vertical Transport Roller

Charge Neutralizing Brushes

Lower Vertical Transport Roller

M-95

14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism The Transport Roller (drive-end) is turned by Main Drive Motor M1 via a timing belt and gear train. Since the Transport Roller is coupled by way of an idle gear to the Vertical Transport Roller (drive-end), the Vertical Transport Roller is turned as the Transport Roller turns.
Transport Roller (driven-end) Paper Transport Clutch Gear

Paper Transport Clutch CL1 Transport Roller (drive-end)

Upper Vertical Transport Roller (drive-end)

Idle Gear

Upper Vertical Transport Roller (driven-end)

Upper Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear

Lower Vertical Transport Roller (drive-end)

Timing Belt

Lower Vertical Transport Roller (driven-end)

Lower Vertical Transport Roller Drive

M-96

14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control The Transport Roller and Vertical Transport Roller are turned when Paper Transport Clutch CL1 is energized by Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The output from Transport Roller Sensor PC54 is used for the control of paper take-up timings. CL1 is energized and deenergized at the following timings.
TRON Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Main Drive Motor M1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 5msec. Approx. 110msec. Approx. 110msec. Approx. 110msec. ON OFF

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Paper Transport Clutch CL1

1136T40MCA

1136C24M

M-97

14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position Right Upper Door Set Sensor PC40, fitted to the copier body, detects the Right Upper Door when closed. The Vertical Transport Rollers (drive-end) and Multi Bypass Table are mounted to the Right Upper Door. Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Right Upper Door is closed, the ribs on the door activate/actuate PC40/S22.
Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 Right Upper Door

Ribs

Right Upper Door Set Sensor PC40

1136C25M

M-98

15 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS
15-1. Construction The Upper Synchronizing Roller is a metal roller covered with a polyvinyl chloride tubing. It is secured to the front and rear frames of the copier. The Lower Synchronizing Roller, a rubber roller, is fitted to the Transport Assy. Pivoting about its rear end, the Lower Roller can be swung downward to facilitate clearing of paper misfeeds.

Upper Synchronizing Roller

Paper Dust Remover

Guide Plates Lower Synchronizing Roller Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Upper Synchronizing Roller Lower Synchronizing Roller

Torsion Spring

M-99

15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism The Upper Synchronizing Roller receives drive from Main Drive Motor M1 via a gear train and timing belt. The Upper Roller drives the lower one. The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 is energized.
Upper Synchronizing Roller Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 To Main Drive Motor M1

Timing Belt

3-Gear Unit

M-100

15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 is energized upon reception of a signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The start of the Rollers is synchronized with the Registration signal (TRON). The TRON signal is output from SCP Board PWB-J at a given time after the Image leading Edge signal (BASE) has been output. The BASE signal is output when the Scanner reaches a given point in its scan motion. (For detailed timings of the TRON and BASE signals, see "8. OPTICAL SECTION.") The Synchronizing Rollers are stopped at a given time after the paper has moved past Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55. Here is the drive timing of the Synchronizing Rollers.
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Approx. 210msec.
1136T41MCA

TRON Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Main Drive Motor M1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2

Approx. 210msec.

Approx. 210msec.

1136C26M

M-101

15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy During conditions of high humidity when the paper is damp, charges would tend to flow from the Image Transfer Corona through the paper and guide plates to the ground. This results in low image density on the copies. To prevent this from occurring, a plastic spacer is installed between the copier frame and each guide plate around the Synchronizing Rollers so that it remains insulated. Instead of using the plastic spacer, an electrodeposition coating has been applied to some of those guide plates. If, however, the resistance with the ground is made infinity, the guide plate would build up charges and a spark can occur with other guide plates, resulting in a malfunction. To prevent this, an 82-megohm resistor and a 1-kV varistor are connected to the guide plates. The guide plates are connected by flat springs as illustrated below.
Synchronizing Rollers C D Transport Rollers A B Varistor Resistor Upper Vertical Transport Rollers E Manual Bypass Feed/Separator Rolls

No.

Guide Plate Name Upper Pre-Synch Guide Plate Lower Pre-Synch Guide Plate Upper Transport Roller Guide Plate Lower Transport Roller Guide Plate Manual Bypass Guide Plate Vertical Transport Guide Plate Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

Insulation Method Plastic Spacer Plastic Spacer None [Fitted to top of guide plate no. ] Plastic Spacer Electrodeposition Coating Plastic Spacer Fitted to plastic holder of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

M-102

Flat Spring A B C D E

Connection Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate Between guide plates and Between guide plates and Between guide plates and

M-103

16 IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS


16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit.

Guide Paper Separator Corona Wire Corona Housing Resistor

Image Transfer Corona Wire Mylar Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit Rail Image Transfer Corona Wire Cleaner

Guides Corona Wires

Cleaner Lever Cleaner Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

M-104

16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation Image Transfer The Image Transfer Corona applies a DC negative corona emission to the underside of the paper thereby attracting the positively charged toner onto the surface of the paper to form a visible, developed image of the original. The Corona Unit is provided with a Corona Wire cleaning mechanism: the operator has only to pull out the lever on which the Cleaner is mounted from the front of the copier, which cleans the Wire. The mylar strips affixed to the housing of the Image Transfer Corona minimize current that flows to the housing, thereby reducing the amount of ozone that is produced. Paper Separation The Paper Separator Corona showers the underside of the paper with both positive and negative charges so that the paper can be easily separated from the PC Drum. In addition, two Paper Separator Fingers physically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum. (For details, see "PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.") Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is provided with a Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate that determines the angle at which the paper comes into contact with the PC Drum and keeps an optimum distance between the paper and the PC Drum so that the image may be properly transferred onto the paper. Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit and Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit Rail are insulated from the copier body. In addition, a 3.5-megohm resistor is connected to the unit rail. This improves the charge application efficiency from the Coronas Unit to the PC Drum and economizes on the output current from High Voltage Unit HV1.

M-105

16-3. Ozone Filter Ozone produced by the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas is absorbed by the Ozone Filter on the back of the copier. It is absorbed from the air being drawn out of the copier through the Duct under the Suction Deck by Suction Fan Motor M4. In this copier, this Ozone Filter absorbs ozone produced by not only the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas but also the PC Drum Charge Corona.

Duct

Ozone Flow

(Front of Copier)

To Ozone Filter

Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

M-106

16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas are turned ON and OFF by turning ON and OFF High Voltage Unit HV1. HV1 is turned ON and OFF by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. Here is the timing chart for the operation of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas.
Approx. 410msec. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Approx. 50msec. Image Transfer Corona Paper Exit Switch S53 ON OFF ON OFF
1136T42MCA

Main Drive Motor M1 Paper Separator Corona Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE Signal Approx. 200msec.

Approx. 150msec. Approx. 100msec. Approx. 290msec.

1136C27M

M-107

17 CLEANING UNIT
17-1. Construction
AIDC Sensor Cleaning Blade PC Unit

Blade Tension Spring

Toner Conveying Coil

PC Drum Paper Separator Finger

Back of PC Unit

Blade Moving Pin

Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear

M-108

17-2. Cleaning Blade 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism The Cleaning Blade is pressed tightly against the surface of the PC Drum and scrapes off any toner remaining on the surface after image transfer. The Blade Tension Spring, hooked onto the Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket, gives an appropriate tension to the Cleaning Blade as it is held against the surface of the PC Drum.
Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket Pivot Cleaning Blade Assy

(Pressed) Residual Toner

Blade Tension Spring PC Unit Frame

17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism The Cleaning Blade is moved to the front and rear while the PC Drum is turning. This is done to ensure that all residual toner is scraped cleanly off the surface of the PC Drum and prevent the Blade edge from deteriorating. The eccentric cam fitted to a shaft of the copier is turned, which pushes the Blade Moving Pin on the Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket. This results in the Cleaning Blade being moved to the front and rear.
To Main Drive Motor M1

Timing Belt Eccentric Cam

Blade Moving Pin Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket

M-109

17-3. Spent Toner Collection 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism The toner which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum by the Cleaning Blade is conveyed by the Toner Conveying Coil towards the rear of the copier and falls into the Toner Collecting Box at the back of the copier through the pipe. The Toner Antispill Mylar is affixed under the Cleaning Blade to receive toner, thus preventing any toner from falling down onto the surface of the copy paper or the paper path.

Cleaning Blade Toner Conveying Coil Residual Toner

Toner Antispill Mylar

Toner Conveying Coil Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear (Copier) Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear (PC Unit)

Spent Toner Flow Pipe

M-110

17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor PC107 detects that the Toner Collecting Box is installed in position. When the optional Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is installed in the Cabinet, Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor PC31 on the Cabinet detects the Box in position. (Data is transferred between the Cabinet and copier through serial communication.) When the Toner Collecting Box is changed from the standard to large capacity type, Key 2 of DIP Switch S1 on Master Board PWB-A of the copier should be switched to ON. This enables the copier to detect the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box. The combination in which S1-2, PC107, PC31 are ON or OFF determines how the copier regards the current situation. See below. NOTE: The Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is available for use in the USA, Canada and Europe only.
S1-2 PC107 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF PC31 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Copier: Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Regards that the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Spent Toner Pipe PWB-A Toner Collecting Box

PC107 Actuator Change the pipe to the long type when the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is used.

PC31

Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box

Actuator

M-111

1136C28MCA

M-112

17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism After image transfer, an AC corona emission is applied to the underside of the paper by the Paper Separator Corona to neutralize the paper so that it can be easily separated from the PC Drum. To further ensure that the paper is positively separated from the PC Drum, there are two Paper Separator Fingers installed. They physically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum. (For details of AC corona emission, see "16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS.") The Paper Separator Fingers are swung up and down by Separator Solenoid SL1.
Separator Solenoid SL1

PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Shaft Swash Plate Cam Return Spring

PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Pivot Pawl (A) Finger Operating Lever

M-113

17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism To prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from damaging the surface of the PC Drum, they are moved over a given distance to the front and rear so that they will contact wider areas of the surface of the PC Drum, thus preventing localized damage of the PC Drum surface. The Swash Cam mounted on the Pivot Pin of the Finger Operating Lever is moved through steps by means of the Ratchet and SL1, causing the Swash Cam to push the Finger Shaft. The lateral movement of the Paper Separator Fingers is 3.5 mm (which is equivalent to 60 times energization and deenergization operations of SL1).

SL1 Energized Pawl (A) is raised.

The Swash Plate is locked in position by Pawl (B).

SL1 Deenergized Ratchet Wheel Swash Cam

Pawl (A) pushes the Swash Cam downward to turn it one notch.

Paper Separator Finger Shaft

M-114

17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control The PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers are moved by energizing and deenergizing Separator Solenoid SL1 as commanded by a signal from Master Board PWB-A. The operation timing is as follows.

TRON

TRON ON OFF

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Approx. 395msec. Approx. 265msec. Separator Solenoid SL1 Approx. 395msec. Approx. 265msec.

ON OFF

1136T43MCA

1136C29M

M-115

17-5. AIDC Sensor To provide image stabilization control, this copier has AIDC Sensor UN3 fitted to the Cleaning Unit of the PC Unit. The sensor is used to detect the toner density and background level on the PC Drum. The copier checks to see if the detection level of UN3 is up to the target level and corrects, as necessary, the PC Drum Charge Corona voltage (Vg) and Exposure Lamp level. For more details, see "IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM." Operation 1: The UN3s LED projects approx. 940-nm infrared light onto the surface of the PC Drum. 2: The UN3s phototransistor detects the amount of light reflected back. 3: The phototransistor outputs a voltage corresponding to the intensity of the light reflected back. Shown below is the relationship between the toner density on the PC Drum and Phototransistor output.
Toner Density High Low Output Low High

Note: The toner density is inversely proportional to the output, because the higher the toner density, the more the projected light is absorbed by toner.

LED Power Input Output Supply Surface of PC Drum

M-116

17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) Except USA, CANADA, EUROPE A Cleaning Bias Seal can be installed optionally. It minimizes damage to the PC Drum from acid paper.

Toner Antispill Mylar PC Drum

Cleaning Bias Seal

Main Drive Motor M1 Cleaning Bias


1136T44MCA

ON OFF
Approx.150msec.ON

OFF

1136C30M

M-117

18 MAIN ERASE LAMP


18-1. Construction Main Erase Lamp LA3 consists of ten tungsten-filament lamps mounted side-by-side on a board. A filter is installed between LA3 and the PC Drum to protect LA3 from contamination. LA3 projects light onto the surface of the PC Drum to neutralize any surface potential remaining after image transfer.
Main Erase Lamp Board

Main Erase Lamp LA3

Filter

18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control LA3 is turned ON and OFF by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. A faulty LA3 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The ON/OFF timing of LA3 is as follows.
ON OFF Approx. 100msec. Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE Signal Approx. 200msec. Main Erase Lamp LA3 Paper Exit Switch S53 Approx. 410msec. Approx. 340msec. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1136T45MCA

Main Drive Motor M1

M-118

1136C31M

M-119

19 PAPER TRANSPORT
19-1. Construction
Suction Fan Ozone Filter

Suction Drive Gear

Suction Belts

Transport Section Release Lever

19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism Pulling the Transport Section Release Lever down swings the Transport Section down, pivoting at the rear of the copier. This facilitates clearing of misfeeds. 1. Pull down the Transport Section Release Lever. 2. The Transport Section Support Lever, coupled via gears to the Transport Section Release Lever, swings down toward the rear of the copier. 3. The front part of the Transport Section pivots at the rear of the copier to swing downward.

Spring

M-120

19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism The Suction Belts are driven by Main Drive Motor M1 through a timing belt and gear train.
Suction Belt Suction Belt Drive Roller Suction Drive Gear

Timing Belt

Main Drive Motor Gear

M-121

19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at low speed in the standby state and at high speed during a copy cycle. The speed is switched by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. A faulty M4 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuit diagram below. M4 is energized at the following timing.

Main Drive Motor M1 Suction Fan Motor M4 Paper Exit Switch S53

Approx. 750msec.

ON OFF High Speed Low Speed ON OFF


1136T46MCA

Approx. 5,150msec.

1136C32M

M-122

20 FUSING UNIT
20-1. Construction and Drive Train
The Upper Fusing Roller and Lower Fusing Roller together apply heat and

pressure to the toner and paper to permanently fix the developed image to the paper. The Cleaning Roller is installed for the cleaning of the Fusing Rollers.
Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger Cleaning Roller Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 Fusing Heater Lamp H1 Upper Fusing Roller Lower Fusing Roller Pressure Spring

1st Paper Exit Roller

Lower Fusing Paper Separator Finger

Drive for the Upper Fusing Roller and Cleaning Roller is transmitted from

Main Drive Motor M1 to the Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear and Cleaning Roller Drive Gear via Timing Belt C and a gear train. The Lower Fusing Roller is driven by the Upper Fusing Roller in contact with it.
Cleaning Roller Upper Fusing Roller

Cleaning Roller Drive Gear

Lower Fusing Roller Main Drive Motor M1

Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear Timing Belt C

M-123

20-2. Fusing Rollers <Upper Fusing Roller> Employed is a teflon-coated roller which features wear resistance and makes for improved fusing performance. It also repels the adherence of melted toner. Further, a conductive coating has been applied to the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby neutralizing any charges. <Lower Fusing Roller> An elastic silicone rubber is used for the Lower Fusing Roller, offering a wider area of contact between the two Fusing Rollers. Since the roller is cleaned only indirectly, the silicone rubber is covered with a teflon tubing. This contributes to preventing smear on the Roller.

Upper Fusing Roller

Aluminum Cylinder Teflon Coating

Teflon Tubing Lower Fusing Roller Silicone Rubber

20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism


To ensure that there is a certain width of area of contact between the

Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers, the Pressure Springs are hooked onto the Pressure Holders at the front and rear ends of the Lower Fusing Roller. The other end of each of the Pressure Springs is hooked to the Pressure Lever, into which a Pressure Screw is installed. When the Pressure Screws are tightened, the Pressure Holders are raised. As a result, the Lower Fusing Roller is brought into tight contact with the Upper Fusing Roller.
Upper Fusing Roller Rear

Front Pressure Screw Lower Fusing Roller Pressure Lever Pressure Holder Pressure Spring

M-124

20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism


The Cleaning Roller is held pressed against the Upper Fusing Roller to The Cleaning Roller turns in the direction opposite to the Upper Fusing

remove toner and paper dust from the Upper Fusing Roller.

Roller and toner and paper dust on the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller stick to the brush of the Cleaning Roller. It also supplies silicone oil to the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby helping the Roller repel the adherence of melted toner and preventing paper from being wound around it.

Cleaning Roller

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

The Cleaning Roller is a hollow aluminum pipe into which silicone oil has

been packed. The surface of the aluminum pipe has many holes. Paper is wrapped around this aluminum pipe to hold the silicone oil and is covered with an oil-impregnated brush.

Silicone Oil

Aluminum Pipe

Paper Brush

M-125

20-5. Paper Separator Fingers


Each of the two Fusing Rollers is provided with Paper Separator Fingers

that strip the paper from the surface of the Rollers.


x Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers The Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers have been coated with

teflon so that they will not be contaminated with toner.


The tip of each Separator Finger is at all times pressed against the

surface of the Upper Fusing Roller by a pressure spring. The fingers are laid out as illustrated below, as paper registration is to one side in this copier.
Upper Fusing Roller Rear Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger

Front

x Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers The Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are flat springs to enhance

paper separating performance and ensure that the paper would not be wedged if a misfeed occurs. The Fusing Lower Guide/Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers Assy is moved down as the Exit Unit is swung down, facilitating clearing of misfeeds.

Fusing Lower Guide/Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers Assy Lower Fusing Paper Separator Finger

Front

Set Spring Rear Exit Unit

M-126

20-6. Fusing Temperature Control <Overview> Fusing Front Thermistor TH1 and Fusing Rear Thermistor TH2 detect changes in the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller at its front and rear ends. The Thermistors input the corresponding analog voltages to pins 78 (TH1) and 77 (TH2) of IC1A on Master Board PWB-A so that PWB-A can control the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller. TH1 is usually used to provide 185C temperature control. TH2 is provided to monitor the temperature at the rear that could rise when paper of a small size is fed through the copier. Both thermistors are located where paper of a small size does not move past.
Fusing Front Thermistor TH1

Fusing Rear Thermistor TH2 Fusing Thermoswitch TS1


1136M080AA

To avoid a current surge when the copier is turned ON, Fusing Heater

Lamp H1 is turned ON with a time lag of 1 second after S1 has been turned ON. To protect H1 from being repeatedly turned ON and OFF, it is kept ON or OFF for a period of 1 second. While the copier is warming up, the Fusing Rollers are turned so that the Lower Fusing Roller receives heat. This ensures good fusing performance immediately after the warm-up.
Predrive Start
Start Key Copy Cycle Energy Saver ON Completed ON Energy Saver OFF

S1 ON

200 C

185 C 180 C 175 C

Time 1Sec 2 minutes and Warm-up Completed 30 seconds or less


1136M158CB

M-127

<Temperature Control When Small Size Paper is Fed Through> TH2 detects the surface temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing Roller. When detecting a temperature of 225C or more, TH2 comes into play to provide the temperature control. If TH1 detects a temperature of 165C or less, then TH1 is used, instead of TH2, to provide the temperature control. H1 is turned ON and OFF under different temperatures detected by TH1 and TH2 as detailed below.
Temperature Detected by Temperature Detected by TH1 TH2 Less than 185C 185C or more 165C or more Less than 165C Less than 225C Less than 225C 225C or more 225C or more H1 ON/OFF ON OFF OFF Turned OFF if currently ON Turned ON if currently OFF

225 C 185 C 165 C

Normal Control by TH1

Control by TH2 with lower temperature monitored by TH1

Start Key

1136M159CA

The Table below shows the relationship between the analog voltage

applied to pins 77 and 78 (AN3 and 4) of IC1A on PWB-A and the Upper Fusing Roller surface temperature.
Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 100 110 120 130 140 Approx. 3.21 Approx. 2.87 Approx. 2.53 Approx. 2.20 Approx. 1.89 Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 150 160 170 180 190 Approx. 1.60 Approx. 1.35 Approx. 1.13 Approx. 0.94 Approx. 0.78 Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 200 210 220 225 Approx. 0.65 Approx. 0.54 Approx. 0.46 Approx. 0.42

M-128

H1 has the following light distribution characteristic. That is, the intensity

at the rear of the Lamp is lower than the front end by about 30% to prevent the temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing Roller from increasing.
(%) 100 70 50

Rear End

Center

Front End

<Predrive> Predrive is performed at the following timing. TH1 detects the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller immediately before H1 is turned ON. If temperature is less than 165C If temperature is 165C or more

Predrive begins when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 175C, provided that the Predrive Inhibit signal is LOW.

Predrive is completed in 30 seconds and the copier becomes ready to make copies when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 185C. .

Predrive is completed in 15 seconds and the copier becomes ready to make copies when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 185C. .

<Detection of Abnormally High Temperature> H1 is turned ON and OFF by the signal output from pin 16 (P51) of IC1A on PWB-A. It is turned ON by a LOW signal and OFF by a HIGH signal. When TH1 detects an abnormally high temperature, the output from pin 7 of IC20A on PWB-A goes from LOW to HIGH. The Self Holding signal goes LOW causing RY1C to turn OFF. This causes RY1 to turn OFF, which cuts off power to H1, turning it OFF.

M-129

1136C33M

M-130

21 EXIT UNIT
21-1. Construction

Left Door

Drive Gear Paper Exit Switch S53 Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 1st Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train, turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.

Driven Roll Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit) 2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

1st Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear

M-131

21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paper into Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.

2nd Paper Exit Roller

Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5

Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

21-3-2. Switching Control The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 is energized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The plate is operated at the following timing.

TRON Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Exit/Duplex Solenoid Clutch CL2 Approx. 1,350msec.

TRON ON OFF ON OFF


1136T47MCA

Approx. 2,770msec.

1136C34M

M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of the copier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for its heat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which gets hot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to the actuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open. This means that S53 is turned OFF.

( ON ) Magnet Paper Exit Switch S53 Driven Roll Reed Switch Contacts ( OFF ) Reed Switch 2nd Paper Exit Roller Magnet

Actuator

21-4-2. Exit Detection The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copier knows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier. Here is the paper exit detection circuit.

1136C35M

M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the Left Upper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door. Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushes the Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.

Left Upper Door Lever Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41

Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23

2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

1136C36M

M-134

22 TOTAL COUNTER
22-1. Total Counter CT1 Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It counts the number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or the number of copy cycles that have been completed. Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. For details, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."

Front Door

Right Door Power Switch S1 Total Counter CT1

M-135

22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. It ensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating the possibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being in position. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out of position for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Key blinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position. 22-3. CT1 Count-Up The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1A and Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up. See the circuit diagram below. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter. * When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode, the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor of the Duplex Unit.

1136C37M

M-136

21 EXIT UNIT
21-1. Construction

Left Door

Drive Gear Paper Exit Switch S53 Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 1st Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train, turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.

Driven Roll Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit) 2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

1st Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear

M-131

21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paper into Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.

2nd Paper Exit Roller

Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5

Exit/Duplex Switching Plate

21-3-2. Switching Control The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 is energized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The plate is operated at the following timing.

TRON Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Exit/Duplex Solenoid Clutch CL2 Approx. 1,350msec.

TRON ON OFF ON OFF


1136T47MCA

Approx. 2,770msec.

1136C34M

M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of the copier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for its heat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which gets hot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to the actuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open. This means that S53 is turned OFF.

( ON ) Magnet Paper Exit Switch S53 Driven Roll Reed Switch Contacts ( OFF ) Reed Switch 2nd Paper Exit Roller Magnet

Actuator

21-4-2. Exit Detection The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copier knows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier. Here is the paper exit detection circuit.

1136C35M

M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the Left Upper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door. Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushes the Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.

Left Upper Door Lever Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41

Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23

2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

1136C36M

M-134

22 TOTAL COUNTER
22-1. Total Counter CT1 Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It counts the number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or the number of copy cycles that have been completed. Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. For details, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."

Front Door

Right Door Power Switch S1 Total Counter CT1

M-135

22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. It ensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating the possibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being in position. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out of position for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Key blinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position. 22-3. CT1 Count-Up The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1A and Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up. See the circuit diagram below. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter. * When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode, the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor of the Duplex Unit.

1136C37M

M-136

23 POWER SUPPLY
The Power supply Sequence from when the Power Cord is Plugged in and the Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) is turned ON is as below. 1. When Power Cord is Plugged in.
Power Cord: Plugged in. DC Power Supply Unit (PU1): ON DC24V: Output Power Supply Board (PWB-C) Main Relay (RY1): OFF AC Power is not supplied. RY2C: OFF RY3: OFF RY1C: OFF RY3C: OFF RY4C: OFF

1
Drum Dehumidifying Heater (H3): ON

1
Power Dehumidifying heater (H2): ON

DC24V is not Supplied (Include Options)

DC5V REM: L (SIC: A)

2
DC5V is not Supplied

RY1C: Normal Open RY2C: Normal Close RY3C: Normal Open

RY4C: Normal Open RY3: Normal Close

1: When Drum Dehumidifying Switch (S3) and Paper Dehumidifying Switch 2: When S1 on Power Supply Board (PWB-C) is set to "A", the DC5V REM
Signal which enters PU1 is L . Therefore DC5V is not supplied. (S12) are OFF, DC24V is not supplied to H2 and H3.

M-137

2. Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) is turned ON.


Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) ON

Power Supply Board (PWB-C) RY-1C: ON

RY3: ON Paper Dehumidifying Heater (H2): OFF

DC5V REM H : Output DC5V from PU1: Output DC5V: Supplied Master Board (PWB-A)

RY2C: ON Drum Dehumidifying Heater (H3): OFF

Power ON Signal L : Output RY1C: Normal Open RY2C: Normal Close RY3C: Normal Open RY4C: Normal Open RY1: Normal Close RY3: Normal Open

RY1 REM L : Output RY1: ON

Option REM L : Output RY3C: ON RY4C: ON

DC5V is converted to DC4.7V by VR1 and ZD1A on Master Board (PWB-A)

DC24V is supplied from Power Supply Board

Supplied AC Power to Heater Lamp etc.

DC24C is supplied to Options

DC4.7V is Supplied

Master Board (PWB-A)

DC24V is Converted to DC12V by IC6A on Master Board (PWB-A)

DC12V is supplied.

M-138

M-139

1136C0RM

M-140

24 MEMORY BACKUP
IC1 (RAM) of RAM Board PWB-R connected to Master Board PWB-A stores the setting/adjustment values set in the Tech. Rep. modes as well as the counter counts. Backup Battery BAT1 is mounted on PWB-R to prevent the contents of memory from being lost when the power cord is unplugged or PWB-R removed from the copier. BAT1 requires a voltage of 2 V or more to retain the contents of memory. Important As noted above, the RAM stores critical data. If PWB-R has been replaced with a new one, memory must first be cleared and then all settings be made again. It should also be noted that PWB-R should not be replaced at the same time when PWB-A is replaced.

1136C38M

M-141

Copyright 1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD Printed in Japan


Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD.

1136-7991-11 94075480 Printed in Japan

EP2050
DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT

CONTENTS
1 1. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 1-1. Precautions for Disassembly/Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Instructions for Handring the PWBs with MOS ICs . . . . . . . . 1-3. Handring of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4. Parts which must not be Touched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts Identification and Removal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 2-2. Removal of PWBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 2-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 (1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 (2) Removal of the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 (3) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (4) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (5) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (6) Replacement/Cleaning of Paper Dust Remover . . . . . . . . D-12 (7) Removal of the Suction Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 (8) Disassembly of the Suction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 (9) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Cleaning of the Feed Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 2-4. Optical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (1) Cleaning of the Original Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (4) Removal of the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 (5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 (6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21 (7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21 (8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th/5th Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22 (9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23 (10) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24 (11) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . D-25 (12) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25 2-5. PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 (1) Removal of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 (2) Disassembly of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 D-1 D-2 D-2 D-4

CONTENTS
(3) Replacement of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (4) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (6) Cleaning of Toner Antispill Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (7) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32 (8) Replacement of the Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32 (9) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33 (10) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers . . . . D-33 (11) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal . . . . . D-33 (12) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (13) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (14) Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (15) Replacement of the Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35 (16) Replacement of the Toner Collecting Box . . . . . . . . . . . D-35 2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit . . . . D-36 (1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36 (2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh . . . D-37 (3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing . . . . . D-37 (4) Cleaning/Replacement of the Image Transfer Corona Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37 (5) Cleaning/Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38 (6) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39 (7) Cleaning of the Image Transfer Guide Plate. . . . . . . . . . . D-39 2-7. Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (1) Removal of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (3) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43 (4) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . D-44 (5) Cleaning of the Lower Guide Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (6) Cleaning of the Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (7) Cleaning of the Thermal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (8) Replacement/Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller . . . . . . . . . D-45 (9) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller . . . . . D-45 (10) Replacement/Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller . . . . D-45 (11) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit. . . . . . . . . . . D-46

ii

CONTENTS
(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit . . . . . . . D-46 3 3 ADJUSTMENT 3-1. Jigs and Tools Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49 3-2. Adjustment Requirement List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-50 3-3. Adjustments of Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51 (1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21 . . . . . . . . D-52 3-4. Adjustment of Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (1) Adjustment of Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . D-53 (2) Adjustment of Developing Unit Timing Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (3) Adjustment of Fusing Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (4) Adjustment of PC Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (5) Adjustment of Scanner Drive Motor Timing Belt. . . . . . . . D-54 3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55 (1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board . . . . . . . D-55 (2) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56 (3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57 (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode . . . . . . . D-58 (5) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Manual mode . . . . . D-59 (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61 (7) Adjustment of Feed Direction Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . D-63 (8) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-65 (9) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd Drawer Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66 (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . D-67 Full size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-67 Enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68 Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-69 (11) Adjustment of Single-Sided Book second page Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-71 (12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-73 (13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width . . . D-75 (14) Adjustment of the Image Erase Lamp Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-77 3-6. Other Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78 (1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78

iii

CONTENTS
(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-79 (3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-80 (4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-81 Replacement of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-82 4 4 MISCELLANEOUS 4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-83

iv

1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTS
Observe the following precautions whenever servicing the copier.

Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier. The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly.
If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the Timing Belt and gears. Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed. Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the Board or connect or disconnect the Board connectors while power is being supplied to the copier. Do not use flammable spray around the copier in operation. The Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates strong magnetic force. Do not bring it near a cathode-ray tube or watch. A used lithium cell should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be discarded casually or left unattended at the users premises. Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit. When handling the PWBs with MOS ICs, observe "1-2. Instructions for Handling the PWBs with MOS ICs." When handling the PC Drum, observe precautions given in "1-3. Handling of the PC Drum." Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items. Use the right screw in the right place at reassembly. Note that some are longer and some are thicker than others. A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do not forget to insert this washer at reassembly. To reassemble the copier, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to change without notice. Do not pull out the Toner Hopper while the Toner Bottle is turning, as a damaged Toner Replenishing Motor or locking mechanism could result. If the copier is to be run with the Front Door swung down, make sure that the Toner Hopper is in the locked position.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.

ADVARSEL!: Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.

D-1

1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs


The following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) ICs. During Transportation/Storage: During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed from their protective conductive bags. Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight. When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case, always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity. Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands. During Replacement: Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the outlet. When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board. Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet. During Inspection: Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool. When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the Board, be sure to ground your body.

1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM


During Transportation/Storage: Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum. The storage temperature is in the range between 20C and +40C. In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time. Handling: Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used. Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its Container or protect it with a Drum Cloth. The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oilbase solvent, fingerprints, and other foreign matter. Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum unless its surface is contaminated with fingerprints.

D-2

If the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure. 1. Place the PC Drum into one half its container.

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum with a dry, dust-free cotton pad. a) Rotate the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is present is facing staright up. Wipe the surface in one continuous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum. b) Rotate the PC Drum sligh6tly and wipe the newly exposed surface area with a clean face of the dust-free cotton pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thoroughly cleaned. * Always use a clean face of the dry dust-free cotton pad until no toner is evident on the face of the pad after wiping. 3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol into a clean, unused dust-free cotton pad which is folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one continuous movement from its rear edge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times. * Never move the pad back and forth.

4. Using the same face of the pad, repeat the procedure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface of the PC Drum is wiped. Always overlap the areas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropriate for cleaning.

NOTES

The Organic Photoconductor Drum is softer than CdS and Selenium Drums and is therefore susceptible to scratches. Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface. Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under interior illumination. If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.

D-3

1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED (1) Red Painted Screws
Purpose of Application of Red Paint Red painted screws show that assembly or unit secured by which can only be adjusted or set at the factory and shall not be readjusted, set, or removed in the field. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint.

(2) Variable Resistors on Board


Do not turn the variable resistors (potentiometers) on boards to which no adjusting instrcutions are given in "ADJUSTMENT".

(3) Other Screws


Although not marked with red paint, the following screws must not be loosened or readjusted. One screw on the Scanner Roller Height Adjusting Plate Three screws on Scanner Rail

Two screws on the Lens Rail

Two screws on the Lower Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

Two screws on the Mirror Motor Unit

D-4

2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts: Identification and Removal Procedures

D-5

No. 1

Part Name Front Door

Removal Procedure Open the Front Door; remove two Front Door Hinge Shafts; remove the Belt Mounting screw inside the Front Door. Open the Front Door; remove the Right Door; remove the Upper Left Cover; remove four screws that secure the Control Panel. Remove two screws that secure the Scale. Remove the Original Cover; remove one screw that secures the Rear Upper Cover (small). Remove the Original Cover and then one screw that secures the Left Hinge Cover. Remove the Original Cover; remove the Right and Left Hinge Covers; remove the Rear Upper Cover (small); remove the Right Cover; remove one screw that secures the Rear Upper Cover. Remove the Original Cover; remove one screw that secures the Right Hinge Cover. Remove the Right Door and then four screws that secure the Right Cover. Open the Right Door; remove the harness from the wiring saddle; unplug three connectors; remove two screws that secure the Right Door. Remove the Counter Cover by snapping it off. Slide out the 2nd Drawer and remove one screw that secures the Stopper at the rear left corner. Slide out the 1st Drawer and remove one screw that secures the Stopper at the rear left corner. Remove the Original Cover by pulling it up. Remove six screws that secure the Upper Left Cover. Remove the Upper Left Cover; open the Left Door; unplug two connectors; remove the E-ring from the Rear Hinge Shaft; remove two screws that secure the Front Hinge Shaft Mounting Plate; remove one screw that secures the belt inside the Right Door. Remove the Upper Left Cover and then four screws that secure the Middle Left Cover. Remove six screws that secure the Rear Cover.

2 3 4 5 6

Control Panel Original Width Scale Original Glass Rear Upper Cover (small) Left Hinge Cover

Rear Upper Cover

8 9

Right Hinge Cover Right Cover

10 11 12 13 14 15

Right Door Counter Cover 2nd Drawer 1st Drawer Original Cover Upper Left Cover

16

Left Door

17 18

Middle Left Cover Rear Cover

D-6

2-2. Removal of PWBs


When removing a PWB, first review "PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs" described Replacement of a PWB may call for readjustment or resetting of particular items. In general, removal procedures omit steps to unplug connectors and remove the PWB from the When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the
Board, be sure to ground your body. PWB support. in SWITCHES ON PWBs and use the removal procedures given on the pages that follow.

x Readjustment/Resetting involved in replacement of PWB-R, UN2, UN3 and UN4

When PWB-R (RAM board) is replaced:


Carry out Memory Clear and then make the Tech. Rep. Choice, Users Choice, and Adjust settings again. When UN2 (Original Size Detecting Board) is replaced: Adjust the Original Size Detecting Board by referring to p. D-55. When UN3 (AIDC Sensor) is replaced: Adjust the Exposure Level in the Auto Mode by referring to p. D-58. When UN4 (ATDC Sensor) is replaced: Discard the developer which was used until the ATDC Sensor was replaced, charge the Developing Unit with fresh developer, and adjust the ATDC by referring to p. D-56.

D-7

Symbol PWB-A PWB-B PWB-C PWB-D PWB-H PWB-I PWB-J PWB-R UN1 UN2

Name Master Board MSC Board Power Supply Board Noise Filter Board AE Sensor Board Tech. Rep. Setting Switch Board SCP Board RAM Board Control Panel Original Size Detecting Board AIDC Sensor ATDC Sensor DC Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit High Voltage Unit

Removal Procedure Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. Remove the Rear Cover and then the Master Board. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board, Power Supply Unit Cover and then DC Supply Unit Cover. Remove the Original Width Scale and then the Original Glass. Open the Front Door. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit, Charge Corona Unit, PC Drum and then the Paper Separator Guide Unit. Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then the Power Supply Unit Cover. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then the ADF Connector Unit. Remove the Rear Cover, SCP Board Mounting Plate and then the High Voltage Unit Cover.

UN3 UN4 PU1 PU2 HV1

D-8

2-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections (1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover and Rear Cover. Slide out the 1st and 2nd Drawers. Open the Front Door. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down. Remove two screws and the PC Unit.

6. Remove two screws and the B Board Protection Cover.

7. Remove three screws that secure the Upper Take-Up Unit at the front of the copier. 8. Remove one screw that secures the Supporting Plate.

9. Remove one screw and the plate spring. 10. Remove one screw that secures the Paper Take-Up Connector Unit.

11. Slide out the Guide Plate in the direction of the arrow.

D-9

12. Unplug the Bias Cord from connector CN on the High Voltage Unit. 13. Unplug connector CN (7P) on the High Voltage Unit.

14. Remove the High Voltage Unit mounting screw. 15. Unplug the Paper Take-Up Connector mounting screw.

16. Open the High Voltage Unit and Paper Take-Up Connector Unit in the direction of the arrow. 17. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit. 18. Remove three screws that secure the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit at the rear of the copier.

19. Remove two screws and the Tension Lever. 20. Remove the C-clip and the Synchronizing Belt.

21. Remove the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit.

D-10

(2) Removal of the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit


1. Remove three screws that secure the Lower Take-Up Unit at the front of the copier.

2. Slide out the Guide Plate in the direction of the arrow.

3. Remove the Toner Collecting Box.

4. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit. 5. Remove three screws that secure the Lower Take-Up Unit at the rear of the copier. 6. Remove one screw that secures the Right Rail Cover.

7. Remove the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit.

D-11

(3) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls


Remove one screw and the Paper Take-Up Roll.

(4) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Paper Take-Up Rolls.

(5) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Roller


Using a brush or a vacuum cleaner, clean the Upper and Lower Synchronizing Rollers.

(6) Replacement/Cleaning of Paper Dust Remover


1. Remove the PC Unit by referring to p. D-26. 2. Using a coin, loosen the screw that secures the Paper Dust Remover at the rear of the copier. 3. Also using the coin, remove the screw that secures the Paper Dust Remover at the front of the copier. 4. Remove the Paper Dust Remover by sliding and lifting it in the direction of the arrow. 5. Replace the Paper Dust Remover with a new one.

D-12

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover.

(7) Removal of the Suction Unit


1. 2. 3. 4. Referring Referring Referring Referring to to to to p. D-82, remove p. D-26, remove p. D-12, remove p. D-40, remove the the the the 1st and 2nd Drawers. PC Unit. Paper Dust Remover. Fusing Unit.

5. Remove the Main Motor cover.

6. Remove three connectors (2P, 2P and 3P) from the Suction Unit.

7. Return the Transport Section Release Lever to its original position. 8. Remove the Transfer/Separator Corona by first pressing it down and then pulling it out.

D-13

9. Remove one screw and the Heat Shield Plate.

1136D305AA

10. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.

11. Holding up the Suction Unit, remove the pressure coil spring. 12. Remove the Suction Unit by sliding it to the right.

(8) Disassembly of the Suction Unit


1. Remove two screws and the Duct. 2. Remove four screws and the Suction Drive Unit.

3. Remove three Suction Driven Rolls.

D-14

4. Remove three belts.

5. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Suction Rolls.

(9) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit


1. Open the Right Door. 2. Remove the harness from one wiring saddle. 3. Unplug three connectors CNs (2P, 3P, 3P)

4. Remove two screws and the Right Door.

5. Remove four screws and the Separator Guide Plate Assy.

D-15

6. Remove the pressure coil spring. NOTE When reinstalling the pressure coil spring, place it so that the its close-coiled end faces the Separator Unit.

7. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Assy.

8. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Roll Assy.

9. Remove the harness from the clamp and wiring saddle.

10. Remove four screws and the Solenoid Mounting Bracket.

D-16

11. Remove two hex cap screws and the electromagnetic spring clutch.

NOTE When reinstalling the electromagnetic spring clutch, tighten the two hex cap screws while orienting the shaft of the Paper Take-Up Roll as shown in the figure on the left. The end of the clutch must be flush with or slightly (up to 1 mm) recessed compared with the end of the shaft of the Paper Take-Up roll. Press the shaft of the Paper Take-Up roll in the direction of the arrow and check that gap A is 1 mm or more.

0 1 mm A
1136D115AA

12. Snap off two C-clips to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy.

D-17

13. Snap off three C-clips to remove the Feed Roll.

14. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.

Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Paper Take-Up Roll.

Cleaning of the Feed Roll


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Feed Roll.

Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Paper Separator Roll.

D-18

2-4. Optical Section (1) Cleaning of the Original Glass


Wipe clean the Original Glass with a soft cloth. NOTE The surface of the Original Glass is coated with conductive material. Do not use a wax based detergent. An alcohol-dampened cloth may be used if the Glass is seriously contaminated.

(2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft


1. Remove two screws and the Original Width Scale. 2. Remove the Original Glass.

3. Wipe clean the Scanner Shaft with a soft cloth.

(3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail


Wipe clean the Scanner Rail with a soft cloth.

D-19

(4) Removal of the Scanner


1. Remove one scanner mounting screw.

2. Remove three screws from the Scanner. Holding the scanner at a point close to the Scanner Shaft, turn the Scanner counterclockwise to remove it.

3. Remove one screw and the Wire Guide. 4. Remove one screw and the Grounding Wire.

5. Unplug the Exposure Lamp connector CN. 6. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector CN. 7. Remove the Scanner.

(5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp


1. Remove one screw to remove the Exposure Lamp Terminal. 2. Slide out the Exposure Lamp.

D-20

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Lamp by gently wiping its surface in one direction. NOTE When reinstalling the Lamp, point the protruding navel of the Lamp toward the opening in the Lamp Reflector so that the protruding navel will not hit against the Lamp Reflector. After reinstalling the Lamp, go to p. D-58 and perform "(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode."

(6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse


1. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector CN. 2. Disconnect the Thermal Fuse wire from the clamp.

3. Remove two screws and the Aperture Blade Assy. 4. Remove one screw and the Thermal Fuse.

NOTE The Thermal Fuse must be in contact with the Lamp Reflector.

(7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors


Wipe clean the Mirrors with a soft cloth.

D-21

(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th/5th Mirrors


1. Remove two screws and the Optical Cover. 2. Remove two screws and the Lens Cover.

3. Gently dust off the surface of the Lens using a soft cloth.

4. Wipe clean the 4th and 5th Mirrors with a soft cloth.

D-22

(9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable


A

Cable Drive Gear

B
1136D135AA

1. Hold the Cable Drive Gear in position with its Bead at the bottom.

2. Wind the longer length of Cable three and 1/4 turns clockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the back to the front side. Then tape it.

1136D137AA

3. Wind the shorter length of Cable three and 1/2 turns counterclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the front to back side. Then tape it.

1136D138AA

4. Pass the longer length of Cable through the hole in the Light Blocking Plate. 5. Slide the Cable Drive Gear onto its shaft and insert a wrench into the hole (4 mm dia.) to position the Cable Drive Gear.

D-23

6. Wind the shorter length of Cable around Pulley A.

7. Secure the shorter length of Cable to the Cable Fixing Bracket, ensuring a distance of 2 mm or less for the dimension shown on the left. Then, secure the Bracket.

(2 mm or less)
1136D141AA

8. Wind the longer length of Cable around the Pulley B. 9. Hook the spring onto the longer length of Cable and then pull the spring to hook it onto the shorter length of Cable. 10. Remove the wrench and peel off the two pieces of tape used in steps 2 and 3.

(10) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable


C

Scanner Drive Gear


1136D143AA

1. Slide the Scanner toward the left side of the copier as far as it will go. 2. Fit one end of the Drive Cable into the fixed anchor. 3. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around (see figure left) Pulley A.

1136D144AA

D-24

4. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley B. 5. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around the Scanner Drive Gear clockwise, working from the bottom upward.

1136D145AA

6. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley C. 7. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley A (see figure). C A

1136D146AA

8. Using a flat head screwdriver, turn the spring anchor at the position shown left and fit the cable onto the it. NOTE Repeatedly slide the Scanner left and right, to verify smooth running of the Scanner Drive Cable.

(11) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protection Filter


Using a soft cloth, wipe clean the 6th Mirror Protection Filter.

(12) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter


1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover. 2. Clean the Filter with a brush or a vacuum cleaner.

D-25

2-5. PC Unit (1) Removal of the PC Unit


1. Open the Front Door. 2. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.

3. Loosen two PC Unit mounting screws. 4. Remove the PC Unit.

(2) Disassembly of the PC Unit


1. Remove the PC Drum Charge Corona Unit.

2. Remove one screw and the PC Drum.

3. Remove the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Cover. 4. Unplug four connectors CNs (2P, 2P, 2P, 3P).

D-26

5. Remove three screws and the Hopper Unit.

6. Remove one screw and the Hopper Lid. 7. Remove two screws and the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate. 8. Remove two screws and the Doctor Blade.

9. Dump the developer out of the Developing Unit.

10. Remove two screws to unplug the 18P connector. 11. Remove three screws and the Mounting Plate Unit. 12. Remove the harness from the Edge Cover.

13. Remove two screws and the Cord Holder.

D-27

14. Remove two screws and the Comveyor Duct Assy. 15. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove the Bushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. NOTE When reinstalling the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw, position it so that the arrow mark on the Bushing is at the top.

16. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove the Bushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. 17. Remove one screw to remove the Bushing of the Developer Conveying Screw.

18. Remove the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. 19. Remove the Developer Conveying Screw.

20. Remove one screw and the Coupling Gear. 21. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring Retaining Washer. 22. Remove the Bucket Bushing. NOTE When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that the back side of the washer faces the screw head.

23. Snap off the E-ring from the Ds Roll at the rear of the unit and then remove the Ds Roll.

D-28

24. Remove one screw and the Bias Terminal. 25. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring Retaining washer. 26. Remove one C-clip and the Bucket Bushing. NOTE When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that the back side of the washer faces the screw head.

27. Remove the Bucket Roller.

28. Snap off the C-clip from the front Ds Roll and then remove the Roll.

29. Remove the Sleeve Roller.

30. Remove the connector CN (2P) from the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy. 31. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy from the clamp. 32. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy.

D-29

33. Remove two screws and the bushing of the Tansfer Coil. 34. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Transfer Coil Gear.

35. Remove two screws and the Transfer Coil.

36. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Blade.

NOTE When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is in contact with the bracket.

37. Remove the spring. 38. Remove one screw and the Bracket.

D-30

(3) Replacement of the PC Drum


1. Remove the PC Drum Charge Corona Unit. 2. Remove one screw and the PC Drum. 3. Secure a new PC Drum with the screw. NOTE After replacement of the PC Drum, reset the the Port/Option counter to zero. See TECH. REP. PROGRAM (SERVICE) MODE in SWITCHES ON PWBs. Also perform the "(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode" on p. D-58.

(4) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate


1. Remove two screws and the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate. 2. Install a new Toner Scattering Prevention Plate and secure it with the two screws.

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate.

(5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Ds Positioning Collars.

(6) Cleaning of Toner Antispill Trap


Using a brush or a vacuum cleaner, clean the Toner Antispill Trap.

D-31

(7) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade


1. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Blade. 2. Replace the Blade with a new one and secure it with the screws.

NOTE When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is in contact with the bracket. See p. D-30. After replacing the Cleaning Blade, apply toner over the surface of the Cleaning Blade. Also apply the lubricant supplied with the Blade to two seals at the points shown (use a brush).

(8) Replacement of the Starter


1. Remove the Hopper Unit. See Step 5 on p. D-27. 2. Remove one screw and the Starter Chamber Lid.

3. Dump the Starter out of the Developing Unit.

4. Fill the Unit with fresh Starter. NOTE After replacement, perform the following steps. 1. Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp. 2. Reset the counter in the "Starter" display. See the "SERVICE MODE" in the "SWITCHES ON PWBs". 3. ATDC Adjustment, see p. D-56. 4. Exposure Adjustment in the Auto Mode, see p. D-58.

D-32

(9) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor


1. Unplug the connector CN (3P) of the AIDC Sensor. 2. Remove three screws and the Paper Separator Guide Assy.

3. Clean the AIDC Sensor with a soft cloth.

(10) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Fingers.

(11) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal


1. Remove two screws and the Toner Antispill Plate and Toner Antispill Seal. 2. Replace the Toner Antispill Seal with a new one.

1. Using a brush, clean the Toner Antispill Seal.

D-33

NOTE When reinstalling the Toner Antispill Plate and Toner Antispill Seal, press them in the direction of the arrows.

(12) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Plate


Using a brush, wisk toner and dust off the the Toner Antispill Plate.

(13) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter


1. Remove the PC Unit by referring to p. D-26. 2. Pull out the Main Erase Lamp Filter in the direction of the arrow.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Filter.

(14) Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Image Erase Lamp.

D-34

(15) Replacement of the Ozone Filter


1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover. 2. Remove one screw and the Ozone Filter Cover. 3. Replace the Ozone Filter with a new one.

(16) Replacement of the Toner Collecting Box


1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover. 2. Replace the Toner Collecting Box with a new one.

D-35

2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit (1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona Wire
1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Drum Charge Corona Wire using the Corona Unit Cleaning Lever.

NOTE If the Drum Charge Corona Wire is seriously contaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently in one direction - from the hook end to the spring end.

1. Press the Mesh holder and remove the Charge Corona Grid Mesh. NOTE When reinstalling the Grid Mesh Holder, note the arrows shown on the left.

2. Remove the two Mesh Holder Covers.

3. Remove the Charge Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 4. Replace the Charge Corona Wire with a new one.

D-36

(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh


Blow all foreign matter off the Grids with a blower brush. NOTE If the blower brush is not effective in cleaning the Grids, use a soft cloth dampened with alcohol to clean serious contamination.

NOTE Place the Grid Mesh on a flat surface and sweep the cloth along the mesh. Do not touch the cleaned Grid Mesh with bare hands.

(3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing


1. Remove the Grid Mesh. 2. Remove the two Holder Covers. 3. Remove the Charge Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Charge Corona Housing.

(4) Cleaning/Replacement of the Image Transfer Corona Wire


1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Image Transfer Corona Wire using the Corona Wire Cleaning Lever.

NOTE If the Image Transfer Corona Wire is seriously contaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently in one direction - from the hook end to the spring end.

D-37

1. Remove the two Holder Covers.

2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.

(5) Cleaning/Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona Wire


1. Remove the four Paper Guides.

2. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Paper Separator Corona Wire gently in one direction - from hook end to spring end.

1. Remove the two Holder Covers. 2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.

D-38

(6) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Housing


1. Remove the four Paper Guides. 2. Remove the two Holder Covers. 3. Remove the Image Transfer and Paper Separator Corona Wires - first at the spring end. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Housing clean.

(7) Cleaning of the Image Transfer Guide Plate


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Lower Pre- Image Transfer Guide Plate.

D-39

2-7. Fusing Unit (1) Removal of the Fusing Unit


1. Open the Left Door. 2. Remove one screw and the Fusing Unit.

(2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit


1. Remove two screws and the Front Cover.

2. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at the front of the copier. 3. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire. 4. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the front of the copier.

5. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at the front of the copier. 6. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the rear of the copier. 7. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire. 8. Remove the Heater Lamp.

9. Remove two screws and the Upper Cover.

D-40

10. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing Guide Plate.

NOTE When reinstalling the Upper Fusing Guide Plate, be sure that both ends of the Plate make full contact with the Frame.

11. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide. 12. Unplug the harness connectors CNs (4P, 4P).

13. Remove two screws and the Harness Guide Plate. 14. Remove one screw and the Thermal Switch Wire.

15. Remove two screws and the Temperature Detector Assy.

D-41

NOTE When reinstalling the Temperature Detector Assy, be sure that both ends of the Assy make full contact with the frame.

16. Remove two screws and the Lower Guide Plate.

NOTE When reinstalling the Lower Guide Plate, press the Plate in the direction of the arrows. Make sure that gap A shown in the figure is 0.8 mm. Also make sure that the rear end of the Lower Guide Plate is pressed against, not riding on, the rear bushing of the M7 jam removal shaft.

17. Remove two screws and the Lower Exit Guide Assy.

18. Loosen the screw that secures the spring bracket at the front of the copier and then unhook the spring at the top. Repeat the step for the spring at the rear of the copier. NOTE When reinstalling the springs, altemately tighten the bracket mounting screws untill the brackets completely contact the ends of the Lower Exit Guide Assy.

D-42

19. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller.

20. Remove the two Springs. 21. Remove the two E- rings from the Cleaning Roller and then the Roller.

22. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing Roller.

(3) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers


1. Remove five Springs. 2. Slide out the Shaft and then remove the Upper Paper Separator Fingers. 3. Replace the Separator Fingers with new ones.

D-43

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Upper Paper Separator Fingers.

(4) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Lower Paper Separator Fingers.

(5) Cleaning of the Lower Guide Plate


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Lower Guide Plate.

(6) Cleaning of the Thermistors


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Thermistors.

(7) Cleaning of the Thermal Switch


Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Thermal Switch.

D-44

(8) Replacement/Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller


1. Remove two screws and the Upper Cover. 2. Remove the Cleaning Roller. 3. Install a new Cleaning Roller.

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Cleaning Roller.

(9) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller


1. Remove the Upper Fusing Roller. 2. Install a new Upper Fusing Roller.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Upper Fusing Roller.

(10) Replacement/Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller


1. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller. 2. Install a new Lower Fusing Roller.

D-45

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Lower Fusing Roller.

(11) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit


1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Open the Left Door. 3. Remove the Upper Left Cover. 4. Remove four screws and the Sorter Connector Assy. 5. Remove one screw and the grounding wire. 6. Unplug two connectors CNs (2P), one each from the Solenoid and Actuator.

1136D304AA

7. Remove one E-ring from the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit Mounting Shaft. 8. Unclamp the harness at the places indicated by the arrows.

9. Remove one belt retaining screw. 10. Remove two screws and the Bracket. 11. Remove the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.

(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit


1. Remove two screws and the cover. 2. Remove three screws and the Exit Cover Assy.

D-46

3. Remove four screws and the Tray Holder. 4. Remove two screws and the ES Cleaner.

5. Remove the harness from three clamps. 6. Unplug the solenoid connector CN (2P).

1136D240AA

7. Remove the gear. 8. Unclamp the harness at four places.

1136D241AA

9. Remove two screws and the Tray Holder.

10. Remove four screws and the Upper Guide Plate.

D-47

11. Remove the harness from one clamp. 12. Remove one screw and the solenoid.

NOTE When reinstalling the solenoid, maintain gap A shown on the left at 4.0 mm to 4.5 mm.

1136D245AA

13. Remove two C-clips and the Switching Fingers.

14. Remove two C-clips and the 2nd Paper Exit Roller.

15. Remove three E-rings and the Roller.

D-48

3 ADJUSTMENT
3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED
xImportant When adjusting the copier, use the jigs shown below: The position of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage: jigs no. and The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller: jigs no. and The position of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers: jigs no. and Jig no. , Pre-Drive Inhibit Switch Actuating Jig, is the same as the Interlock Switch Jig used for model EP3170. Jig no. , D.B. Adjusting jig, is the same as the one used for model EP1080.

Front Door Interlock


Switch Actuating Jig

Pre-Drive Inhibit Switch


Actuating Jig

Scanner Positioning Jig

Scanner/Carriage
Positioning Jig

Sleeve/Magnet Roller
Positioning Jig

D.B. Adjusting Jig

PC Drum Paper
Separator Finger Positioning Jig

D-49

3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENT LIST


Adjustment Item Exposure Setting (manual mode) Crosswise Magnification, Full Size Crosswise Magnification, Enlargement Crosswise Magnification, Reduction Feed Direction Magnification, Full Size Feed Direction Magnification, Enlargement Feed Direction Magnification, Reduction Manual Bypass Table Reference Position 1st Drawer Reference Position 2nd Drawer Reference Position Leading Edge Registration, Full Size Leading Edge Registration, Enlargement Leading Edge Registration, Reduction Single-Sided Book second page Leading Edge Registration Image Leading Edge Erase Width Image Trailing Edge Erase Width Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp Position Requirement Kodak Gray Scale: No image on the 1st step Faint image on the 2nd step (1.000) 200 1.0 mm (2.000) 200 1.5 mm (0.500) 100 1.5 mm (1.000) 300 1.5 mm (2.000) 300 1.5 mm (0.500) 150 2.5 mm (1.000) 20 2.0 mm (1.000) 20 2.0 mm (1.000) 20 2.0 mm (1.000) 20 1.5 mm (2.000) 40 3.0 mm (0.500) 10 1.5 mm Adjusting Point Control Panel Page D-59

Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Manual Bypass Table Drawer Positioning Plate Drawer Positioning Plate Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel

D-61 D-61 D-61 D-63 D-63 D-63 D-65 D-66 D-66 D-67 D-68 D-69

(1.000) 20 3.0 mm

Control Panel

D-71

(1.000) 16.5 mm (1.000) 0.55.5 mm (1.000) 0.53.0 mm

Control Panel Control Panel Edge Erase With Adjuster Screw

D-73 D-75 D-77

D-50

3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES


xMicroswitches The following microswitches are used in various parts of this copier.

Blue Yellow

Red

Red

Wiring for the NO Type

Wiring for the NC Type

NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open. NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is closed. COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO xRequirement Actuator The gap between the switch and actuator should be 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm when the actuator is closed.

COM 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm

NC NO

xOut-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed) If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current does not at times flow to NC or NO. . If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can be broken

D-51

(1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21


1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (4 screws)

3. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. (3 screws) 4. Loosen the two screws that secure the Front Door Interlock Switch. (2 screws)

5. Close the Front Door. 6. Gently move the switch toward the front side of the copier until the actuator is closed by the actuator stop on the Front Door. Tighten the two S21 mounting screws. Note that S21 is to be configured as a NO switch.
1136D011AA

D-52

3-4. Adjustment of Belt Tension


xImportant Before adjusting, make sure that all gears are positively meshed and the belts snugly fit in pulley grooves. When making a rough judgement of belt tension, press down on the belt midway on its longest span (indicated by thin arrow in the figure below). Belt (1) Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt (2) Developing Unit Timing Belt (3) Fusing Unit Timing Belt (4) PC Unit Timing Belt Tension 300 100 g 350 100 g 350 100 g 350 100 g Deflection (Reference only) Approx. 3 mm Approx. 4 mm Approx. 3 mm Approx. 5 mm

1. Loosen the two screws that hold the tension lever. Press the tension lever in the direction of the arrow. When belt tension is correct, tighten the two screws.

350 100 g

350 100 g

300 100 g

350 100 g

D-53

(5) Adjustment of Scanner Drive Motor Timing Belt


1. Loosen the three screws on the motor sliding plate until it can move smoothly. 2. Finger-turn the motor shaft two or three turns.

3. Rotate the motor case counterclockwise and clockwise and then release the motor. Make sure that the coil spring smoothly returns the motor case and the motor sliding plate to the original position. Verify the spring operation by repeating the rotation.

4. Tighten the screws, first screw A, B and then C.

NOTE Check that one end of the coil spring is in the correct hole in the plate as shown.

D-54

3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments (1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board
xImportant This adjustment must be made after memory has been cleared or the RAM Board or Original Size Detecting Board has been replaced; or the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced or a sensor is added. 1. Close the Original Cover with no paper on the Original Glass.

1136D017AA

2. Open the System Panel. 3. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P11DAA

Tech. Rep. Card-1


Card-1 Card-1

Security Mode

Tech. Rep Choice ROM Version ADF Setting

Jam

Paper

Retry

Port

5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 7 to set the copier into Test mode F7. 6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the adjustment. NOTE During the adjustment, the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 7. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble Auto CPU Reset

Maintenance

Consumables

Counter

Enter:

Function Mode

1136P02DCA

D-55

(2) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor


xImportant Perform this adjustment only after replacing the developer. 1. Disassemble the PC Unit and fill the Developing Unit with new developer. For developer replacement procedure, see page D-32. 2. Replace the components removed during the replacement and then return the unit to the copier.

3. Open the System Panel. 4. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P11DAA

Tech. Rep. Card-1


Card-1 Card-1

Security Mode

Tech. Rep Choice ROM Version ADF Setting

Jam

Paper

Retry

Port

6. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 8 to set the copier into Test mode F8. 7. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the adjustment. NOTE
1136P02DCA

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble Auto CPU Reset

Maintenance

Consumables

Counter

Enter:

Function Mode

During the adjustment (for approx. 3 minutes), the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 8. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode. 9. Note the ATDC reference level shown on the message display and log the level onto the Factory Settings Label. Refer to Section TECH. REP. PROGRAM MODE in the SWITCHES ON PWBs manual.

D-56

(3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades


xRequirement After adjustment, there should be no dark or light bands running in the feeding direction on the reproduced image. xImportant If a dark or light band running in the feeding direction is found on copies, go to the following steps before starting the adjustment. 1) Clean the Drum Charge Corona Wire, Grid Mesh and Image Transfer Corona Wire as necessary. 2) Clean the surface of the Mirrors and Lens as necessary. 3) Verify that the surfaces of the Exposure Lamp and Main Erase Lamp are free of dirt. 4) Verify that the Cleaning Blade is free of waviness. 1. Make a copy under the following control panel settings. Original: A3 or A4C 11" 17" or 11" 8-1/2" (crosswise) Paper: A3L (11" 17") or A4C (11" 8-1/2") 11" 17" or 11" 8-1/2" (crosswise) Magnification: 100% Exposure: Manual (setting convenient for checking)

2. Remove the Original Glass. 3. Turn the copy on the Copy Tray around as shown to reverse the leading and trailing edges and align it with the Aperture Blades.

4. Adjust to obtain the center image density for all areas on the copy. NOTE To make the image darker, move the Aperture Blade toward the Auxiliary Reflector. To make the image lighter, move the Aperture Blade away from the Auxiliary Reflector.

D-57

(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode


1. Select the Auto Exposure Mode. Place five sheets of A3 or 11" 17" white paper (no image) on the Original Glass and close the Original Cover.

2. Open the System Panel. 3. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1 in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P11DAA

Tech. Rep. Card-1


Card-1 Card-1

Security Mode

Tech. Rep Choice ROM Version ADF Setting

Jam

Paper

Retry

Port

5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 5 to set the copier into Test mode F5. 6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the Auto Exposure adjustment. NOTE During the adjustment (for approx. 30 seconds), the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 7. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode. 8. Go to p. D-59.

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble Auto CPU Reset

Maintenance

Consumables

Counter

Enter:

Function Mode

1136P02DCA

D-58

(5) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Manual mode


xRequirement Setting range: 44-56 No image of step No. 1 of the Kodak Gray Scale should be reproduced on the copy, but a faint image of step No. 2 should be reproduced when the center LED on the Exposure Level Indicator is lit.

1136D300AA

xImportant

This adjustment should be follow Checking Auto Exposure Level and Adjustment of the Aperture
Blades. 1. Place the Kodak Gray Scale (KGS) lengthwise, face down and at the center on the Original Glass. Place a sheet of white (no image) A3 or 11" 17" paper over the KGS and then close the Original Cover. 2. Set the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. Using the Exposure Control keys, set the exposure level so that the center LED on the Exposure Level Indicator lights. Make 15 A3 or 11" 17" copies and check that the 15th copy meets the exposure requirement given above. If the requirement is not met, perform the following adjustment steps. 3. Open the System Panel. 4. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P11DAA

D-59

Tech. Rep. Card-1


Card-1 Card-1

Security Mode

6. Press Multi-Copy key 1 and the Tech. Rep. Choice key (on the card).
Paper

Tech. Rep Choice ROM Version ADF Setting

Jam

Retry

Port

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble Auto CPU Reset

Maintenance

Consumables

Counter

Enter:

Tech. Rep Choice

1136P04DCA

7. Press the OK key (on the card) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Exp. Lamp Manual Adjust". 8. Note the value shown below the message. Press the Clear key to clear the value. 9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for optimum exposure level: Adjustment procedure To make the image darker: decrease the value. To make the image lighter: increase the value.
E x p . L amp Ma n u a l Ad j u s t : XX ( 4 4 5 6 )
1136P06DCA

10. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 11. Go to p. D-58, (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode followed by (5) Checking Manual Exposure Level and Steps 1 and 2 of this adjustment.

D-60

(6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification


xRequirement A copy of dimension A on the GTC-001 chart should measure the value shown in the table below when copied under the conditions given in the table. Setting range: 43-58

1136D025AA

Magnification Full size (1.000) Enlargement (2.000) Reduction (0.500)

Tolerance 200 1.0 mm 200 1.5 mm 100 1.5 mm

Adjustment mode

A-1

xImportant This adjustment should be made before the adjustments for Reference Position, Adjustments (8) and (9). 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare the dimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with that on the test chart. If the dimension is outside the tolerance, adjust the magnification setting in the following procedure.

3. Open the System Panel.

D-61

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the Adjustment Mode.

1136P11DAA

6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Full Size Position (A 1)". 7. Note the value shown under the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for the correct magnification. Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A (200 mm) is: 199 mm or less: increase the value. 201 mm or more: decrease the value.
Lens Fu l l S i ze Po s i t i on : (A 1 ) XX ( 4 3 5 8 )
1136P08DCA

9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in enlargement and reduction modes and verify that dimension A on the copies is within tolerance. NOTE In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A of the scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence, the measurement of 200 1.5 mm in the table.

D-62

(7) Adjustment of Feed Direction Magnification


xRequirement A copy of dimension A on the GTC-001 chart should measure the value shown in the table below when copied under the conditions given in the table. Setting range: 46-54

1136D028AA

Magnification Full size (1.000) Enlargement (2.000) Reduction (0.500)

Tolerance 300 1.5 mm 300 1.5 mm 150 2.5 mm

Adjustment mode

A-3

xImportant This adjustment should be performed before (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration.

1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare the dimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with that on the test chart. If the copy of dimension A is outside the tolerance, adjust the magnification setting in the following procedure.

3. Open the System Panel.

D-63

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the Adjustment Mode.

1136P11DAA

6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message " Feed Direction Mag. Ratio: (A 3)". 7. Note the value shown under the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for the correct magnification: Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A (300 mm) is: 298.5 mm or less: increase the value. 301.5 mm or more: decrease the value.
Feed D i r ec t i on Ma g . R a t i o : ( A 3 ) XX ( 4 6 5 4 )
1136P10DCA

9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in the enlargement and reduction modes and verify that dimension A on the copies is within tolerance. NOTE In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A of the scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence, the measurement of 300 1.5 mm in the table.

D-64

(8) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference Position


xRequirement A copy of horizontal lines A (width 20 mm), shown in the left figure, in the GTC-001 chart, should have a width of 20 2.0 mm.

1136D029AA

xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" 17" paper through the Manual Bypass Table, make two full size copies. 3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.
1136D030AA

4. If the measured width is not 20 2.0 mm, loosen the three screws that hold the Manual Bypass Table and move the Table in the direction of the arrow: Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 18 mm or less: move the Table to the front. When the copy of dimension A is 22 mm or more: move the Table to the rear.

1136D031AA

NOTE When an ADF is mounted, it involves changing the Original Glass. This in turn, results in the position of the Original Length Scale being slightly shifted toward the rear. This is corrected by the Original Positioning Plate when the Original Cover is closed.

D-65

(9) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd Drawer Reference Postion


xRequirement A copy of horizontal lines A (width 20 mm), shown in the left figure, in the GTC-001 chart, should have a width of 20 2.0 mm.

1136D029AA

xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" 17" paper from the 1st Drawer, make two full size copies. 3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.
1136D030AA

4. If the measured width is not 20 2.0 mm, slide out the 1st Drawer. Loosen the two screws shown in the left figure and move the Tray Positioning Plate toward the front or rear. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the reference position of the 2nd Drawer. Adjustment procedure
1136D032AA

When the copy of width A is 18 mm or less: move the Plate toward the rear. When the copy of width A is 22 mm or more: move the Plate toward the front.

D-66

(10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration


Magnification Full size (1.000) Enlargement (2.000) Reduction (0.500) Full Size xRequirement A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm), shown in the left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have a width of 20 1.5 mm. Setting range: 40-60 Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.4 mm Tolerance 20 1.5 mm 40 3.0 mm 10 1.5 mm Adjustment mode A-4 A-11 A-5

This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (7) Adjustment of Feed
Direction Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in full size mode and check the second copy for leading edge registration. When the registration is within the tolerance, go to "Enlargement" of this adjustment. Otherwise, go to step 3. 3. Open the System Panel.

xImportant

1136D033AA

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

D-67

6. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Full Size: (A 4)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 18.5 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 21.5 mm or more: increase the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode.

Len s Po s i t i on Fu l l S i ze : (A XX ( 4 0 6 0 )

4 )

1136P13DCA

Enlargement xRequirement A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 40 3.0 mm. Setting range: 40-60 Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.8 mm xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the adjustment for the leading edge in full size. 1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in enlargement mode (2.000) and check the second copy for leading edge registration. When the registration is within the tolerance, go to "Reduction" of this adjustment. Otherwise, go to step 2.

2. Open the System Panel.

D-68

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

3. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 4. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Enlargement (A 11)". 6. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 7. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 37.0 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 43.0 mm or more: increase the setting.

Len s Po s i t i on E n l a r g eme n t ( A 1 1 ) XX ( 4 0 6 0 )
1136P15DCA

8. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

Reduction xRequirement A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 10 1.5 mm. Setting range: 40-60 Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.2 mm xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the leading edge adjustment in full size. 1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in reduction mode (0.500) and check the second copy for leading edge registration. If the registration is outside the tolerance, go to step 2.

D-69

2. Open the System Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

3. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 4. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Reduction: (A 5)". 6. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 7. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 8.5 mm or less: decrease the settings. When the copy of dimension A is 11.5 mm or more: increase the settings.

Len s Po s i t i on Re d u c t i o n : ( A XX ( 4 0 6 0 )

5 )

1136P17DCA

8. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

D-70

(11) Adjustment of Single-Sided Book second page Leading Edge Registration


xRequirement A copy of reference dimension A (width 20 mm), shown in the left figure, of an A3 test chart, should have a width of 20 3.0 mm on the second page. Note that B = C. Setting range: 45-55 Unit of image leading edge movement (on the second page): 0.4 mm
1136D036AA

1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover.

2. Open the System Panel. 3. Press the Book Mode key once to select Book 1 (single-sided) mode. 4. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A4 crosswise or 11" 8-1/2" paper. Check the second page of the second copy for leading edge registration. If the registration error is outside the tolerance of 20 3.0 mm, go to step 5.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 6. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

7. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Book B-Scan Regist. : (A 6)". 8. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value, for the correct dimension A on the copy:

D-71

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 17 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 23 mm or more: increase the setting. 10. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

B o o k B |S c a n Re g i s t . : (A XX ( 4 5 5 5 )

6 )

1136P19DCA

D-72

(12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width


xRequirement A copy of reference dimension A (width 6.5 mm), shown in the left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have an erase width of 1.0-6.5 mm. Setting range: 45-55 Unit of erase width: 1.0 mm

xImportant This adjustment should be made after the leading edge registration adjustments (Full size, Enlargement and Reduction, and Book). 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 1.0-6.5 mm, go to step 3.

3. Open the System Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

D-73

6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Leading Edge Erase: (A 12)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value, for the correct erase width in dimension A on the copy:

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 1.0 mm or less: increase the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 6.5 mm or more: decrease the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

Lead i ng Edge Er ase : ( A12 ) XX ( 4 5 5 5 )


1136P21DCA

D-74

(13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width


xRequirement A copy of reference dimension A (width 5.5 mm), shown in the left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have an erase width of 0.5-5.5 mm. Setting range: 42-58 Unit of erase width: 1.0 mm

xImportant This adjustment should be made after the Image Leading Edge Erase Width adjustment. Before starting the adjustment, make sure that SCH-21 is set at "Edge Erase On". Refer to the Tech. Rep. Program mode in the SWITCHES ON PWBs manual. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 0.5-5.5 mm, go to step 3.
1136D042AA

3. Open the System Panel.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9 C

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.

1136P11DAA

D-75

6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Trailing Edge Erase: (A 13)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease setting with respect to the noted value for the correct erase width in dimension A on the copy:

Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 0.5 mm or less: increase the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 5.5 mm or more: decrease the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode.

T r a i l i ng Er ase : XX ( 4 2

Edge ( A13 ) 58 )
1136P23DCA

D-76

(14) Adjustment of the Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp Position


xRequirement A copy of reference dimension A (width 3.0 mm), shown in the left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have an erase width of 0.5-3.0 mm.

xImportant This adjustment must be made after the reference positions of the Manual Bypass Table and 1st and 2nd Drawers have been adjusted. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in the full size mode (1.000).

1136D044AA

3. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 0.5-3.0 mm, turn the Edge Width Adjuster screw in the direction shown below: Adjustment procedure When the erase width in dimension A is 0.5 mm or less: clockwise. When the erase width in dimension A is 3.0 mm or more: counterclockwise.

D-77

3-6. Other Adjustments (1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage
xRequirement With the Scanner positioned in place on the copier upper frame, there should be no gap between one end of the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig and the Scanner and between the other end of the jig and the Mirrors Carriage. The space between the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage = 83.5 mm xImportant This adjustment should be performed with the Scanner loosely attached to the Scanner Drive Cable by slightly loosening the screw on the Scanner Drive Cable Holding Bracket. 1. Align the rectangular hole in the upper copier frame with the U groove in the Scanner. Insert the Scanner Positioning jig.

2. Install the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig between the Scanner and the Mirrors Carriage.

83.5 mm

3. Press the Mirrors Carriage in the direction of the arrow. 4. Verify that both ends of the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig have no gap.

1136D048AA

5. Tighten the screw on the Scanner Drive Wire Holding Bracket.

D-78

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller
xRequirement The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller should be in the range of 0.33 to 0.40 mm. 1. Remove the PC Unit, PC Drum Charge Corona and PC Drum. 2. Remove the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate by first removing two mounting screws.

3. Using a brush, wipe the developer off the surface of the Sleeve Roller.

1136D050AA

4. Install the Sleeve/Magnet Roller Positioning Jig onto the PC Unit.

5. Loosen the three screws securing the Doctor Blade. Insert the D.B. Adjusting jigs between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller. 6. Press down the Doctor Blade until it positively contacts the D.B. Adjusting jigs, then tighten the three screws to secure the Doctor Blade.

D-79

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position


xRequirement The gap between the PC Drum and Paper Separator Fingers should be 1.0 0.5 mm when the Separator solenoid is deenergized. xImportant Use care not to deform the Separator Fingers during the adjustment procedure. 1. Attach the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Positioning jig to the PC Unit.

1136D053AA

2. Using a hexsocket wrench, turn the set screw on one Finger Holder to adjust the gap between the Finger and PC Drum as described below. Adjustment procedure With the solenoid deenergized, the tip of the Finger should be at a point between A and B. With the solenoid energized, the tip of the Finger should touch point C. A ....... 41.5 mm B ....... 40.5 mm C ....... 40.0 mm

1136D055AA

3. Verify that the other Paper Separator Finger operates in the same way. If not, perform step 2. NOTE If correct values cannot be obtained, loosen the two solenoid mounting screws and adjust the position of the solenoid. Then repeat step 2.

D-80

(4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers)
xImportant When the size of the paper loaded in the 1st or 2nd Drawer has been changed, be sure to change the Springs. When changing the Springs, also change the position of the Springs and Paper Take-Up Roll of the Drawer. Each drawer uses two Springs and has two spare Springs stored in the underside of the drawer. For disassembly of the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit, refer to p. D-12. 1. Determine the correct Springs, spring position and Paper Take- Up Roll Unit position by referring to the table below. Example Paper size: A4 lengthwise or 8-1/2" 11" 1) Place one SP Silver spring in the drawer at ALL SP1. 1-9, SP2. 10-14. 2) Place the other SP Silver spring at SP1. 6-9, SP2. 10-14. 3) Place the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit at position No. 3.

Position of 1st (2nd) Drawer Spring

1st (2nd) Drawer No. Paper Size Indication

ALL SP1. 6~9 SP1. 1~9 SP2. 12~14 SP1. 2~5 SP2. 10~11 SP2. 10~14

SP1. 1

1st (2nd) Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll Position 6 5 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 Edge Guide 7 8 9

A3/A4 11"17"LTR. G. LTR SP Silver B4/B5 254 SP Silver

SP Silver

4 4 3

FLS. SP Silver LTR. A4

3 3 3 2 SP Gold 2 SP Gold SP Gold 1 1 1

10 FLS. 11 B5 12 13 A5 14 INV.

D-81

Replacement of Springs This procedure is for the 1st Drawer. The steps also apply to the 2nd drawer. 1. Pull out the 1st Drawer and remove the stopper screw and then the stopper. 2. Remove the Drawer.

3. Remove the Hinge Shaft from the front Paper Separator Finger and then the Finger.

4. Remove the screw from Side Guide Plate I.

5. Lift the hinged portion and then swing the Paper Lifting Plate in the direction of the arrow. Change the springs. Close the Plate.

D-82

4 MISCELLANEOUS
4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket
1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle. 3. Unplug three CN connectors, 2P, 3P and 3P.

4. Remove the Right Cover by removing two screws.

5. Remove the Counter Cover. 6. Remove the four screws from the Right Cover and then the cover.

7. Remove the PC Unit. 8. Remove the B Board Protection Cover by first removing two screws.

9. Connect the Plug-in Counter Connector. 10. Secure the Plug-in Counter Mounting Bracket with two screws.

D-83

MEMO

Copyright 1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD Printed in Japan


Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD.

1136-7992-11 94075480 Printed in Japan

EP2050
SWITCHES ON PWBs, TECH. REP. MODE

CONTENTS
1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs 1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 1-2. Precautions for Replacement/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 2 FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND VARIABLE RESISTORS ON PWBs 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 3 Master Board (PWB-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 Power Supply Board (PWB-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3 Original Size Detecting Board (UN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3 Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board (PWB-I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-4

TECH. REP. MODE 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. Tech. Rep. Mode Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-6 Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9 Tech. Rep. Choice Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12 Paper Size Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-19 System Setting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21 A. Changing the fixed zoom ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21 B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22 C. Setting the marketing area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-23 3-6. Counter Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-24 A. Paper Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-25 B. Jam Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-26 C. Feed Retry Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27 D. Trouble Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28 E. Maintenance Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-31 F. Port/Option Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32 G. Consumables Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-33 H. Auto CPU Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-34 3-7. ROM Version Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-35 3-8. ADF Setting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-36 3-9. Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-38 3-10. I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-39 3-11. Level History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-49

CONTENTS
.4. . .ADJUST. MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-51 ...... ......

.5. . .USERS.CHOICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODE

6 LIST OF SETTINGS TO BE MADE DUE TO PARTS . . . .REPLACEMENT .OR. MEMORY .CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-69 ............. .. ........ .........

ii

1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs


1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage
a) Before transporting or storing the PWBs, put them in protective conductive cases or bags so that they are not subjected to high temperature (they are not exposed to direct sunlight). b) Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged. c) Once the PWB has been removed from its conductive case or bag, never place it directly on an object that is easily charged with static electricity (carpet, plastic bags, etc.). d) Do not touch the parts and printed patterns on the PWBs with bare hands.

1-2. Precautions for Replacement/Inspection


a) Whenever replacing the PWB, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged. b) When the power is on, the connectors must not be plugged in or unplugged. c) Use care not to strap the pins of an IC with a metal tool. d) When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch the metal part before touching the PWB to discharge static electricity.

S-1

FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND VARIABLE RESISTORS ON PWBs

2-1. Master Board (PWB-A)

LD2

LD1

VR1

TONER BOTTLE 2 1
ON OFF

PWB-A

S1

1136S003AA
1136S003AA

VR1: DC 4.7V Adjusting Variable Resistor (for factory setting) LD1: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 5V) LD2: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 24V) S1-2: Toner Collection Box Select Switch
Toner Collection Box S1A 80K (Supplied) ON 180K (Can be fitted into the Paper Feed Cabinet) q q

OFF : Initial setting

S-2

2-2. Power Supply Board (PWB-C)

S1C

PWB-C

1136S004AA

S1C: When the DT-103 is fitted to the copier, this switch is used to maintain communication (DC
5V applied) when the Power Switch is turned OFF. S1C Position A Position B Description DC 5V is shut off when the Power is turned OFF. DC 5V is applied if the Power Switch is turned OFF.

2-3. Original Size Detecting Board (UN2)

J1

UN2

J2

1136S005AA

J1: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 has been installed, change the position of the jumper connector. J2: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensors CD2, FD3 have been installed, change the position of the jumper connector. Note: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor(s) has (have) been installed and the positions of the jumper connectors changed, the Function Mode "F7" must be executed. Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Yes J1 Position of jumper connector O
1136S006AA

CD2 FD3 No J1 O
1136S007AA

Yes J2 O
1136S006AA

No J2 O
1136S007AA

S-3

2-4. Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board

CONTRAST INI TROUBLE

PJ2

S1 VR1

TP1

TP3

TP2

GND

TOTAL

MEMORY
1136S008AA

Symbol PJ2 (INI)

Name Initialize Points

Function Used to clear data other than the Program Memory, Electronic Counter, Tech. Rep./User choice and zoom ratio data. Used to reset trouble related to Exposure Lamp malfunction (C04xx) and Fusing malfunction (C05xx). Used to adjust the contrast of the Message Display. Used to clear all data except the Electronic Counter and Level History (ATDC level). Ground used for memory clear and total clear.

Reset/Clear Method

Application

While connecting the Used when a two pins of PJ2, turn malfunction cannot the Power Switch ON. be corrected by turning the Power Switch ON/OFF.

S1 (TROUBLE)

Trouble Reset Switch

Press the Trouble Reset Switch after correcting the area in trouble.

To reset other trouble or misfeeds, open and close the Front Door.

VR1 Contrast (CONTRAST) Adjusting Variable Resistor TP2 (MEMORY) Memory Clear Test Point

While connecting the Memory Clear Pin (TP2) and GND Pin (TP1), turn the Power Switch ON.

Used when incorrect operation cannot be corrected by initializing.

TP1 (GND)

GND Test Point

S-4

List of Data Cleared by the Switch and Points Initialize Points PJ2 (INI) Trouble Reset Switch S1 (TROUBLE) Memory Clear Test Point TP2 (MEMORY)

Data Cleared

Trouble related to Exposure Lamp malfunction (C04xx) and Fusing malfunction (C05xx) Other trouble and misfeeds Incorrect operation/incorrect display Program memory Tech. Rep. choice Paper size System setting ADF setting Adjust mode User choice

q q q q q q q q q

S-5

3 TECH. REP. MODE


This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to make various adjustments and settings and to perform
specific functions.

3-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Setting Procedure


Use the Tech. Rep. Card (1, 2) to set the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Tech. Rep. Card

Tech. Rep. Card - 1


Card - 2 Card - 1
Security Mode

Tech. Rep. Choice ROM Varsion ADF Setting

Jam

Paper

Retry

Port

Paper Size Input System Input

Function

Trouble

Maintenance

Auto CPU Reset

Consumables

Counter
Enter F O P

1136P04GCA

Tech.Rep. Card - 2
Card - 2 Card - 1
Tech. Rep. ID Code

Data Save

Level History

Passage Sensor Control Boad

Initial Transmission

Data Load

DT Setting

Call Completion Counter Clear

Port

Panel Indication

Memory

RD Mode

I/O Check

MINOLTA CAMERA CO, LTD.

1136P03GCA

S-6

Set the Tech. Rep. Mode by the following procedures:


(1) In the ordinary mode, place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Open the System Panel. Press the Stop Key. Press Multi-Copy Key "0". Press the Stop Key. Press Multi-Copy Key "1". The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

Tech. Rep. Card No. Entry State

(2) Select the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card to set the corresponding Tech. Rep. Mode. 1) Place the Tech. Rep. Card (1 or 2) on the Supplementary Panel. 2) Enter the Tech. Rep. Card Number (1 or 2) with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key. 3) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

4) By selecting the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card, the corresponding Tech. Rep. Mode is set. Note: When it is desired to change the Tech. Rep. Card Number after entering the number, press "CARD-1 CARD-2" or "CARD-2 CARD-1" on the Tech. Rep. Card to return to the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

(3) Resetting procedure

Press the Panel Reset Key. Remove the Tech. Rep. Card and Close the System Panel.

S-7

Types of Tech. Rep. Modes Tech. Rep. Card-1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Mode Tech. Rep. Choice Mode Paper Size Input Mode System Input Mode Counter Mode ROM Version Mode ADF Setting Mode Security Mode Item Tech. Rep. Card-2 No. 1 2 RD Mode I/O Check Item

S-8

3-2. Function Mode


This mode is used to check and adjust the operation of the machine.
Setting procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Function". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

F _ x1.000
1136S146CA

6) Enter the Function Mode No. with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key. 7) Press the Start Key to start the function operation. 8) Press the Stop Key to terminate the function operation.

S-9

Types, Description and Operation Time of the Function Mode Function Mode F1 Paper passage test F2 Adjustment of High Voltage Unit HV1 output for Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas F3 Exposure Lamp ON confirmation Description This test can be initiated without having to wait for warm-up to complete. Press the Start Key to start the operation. The Scanner makes a scan motion according to the paper size and zoom ratio. The counters do not count up. Operation Time This Test continues until the Stop Key is pressed or the Drawer or port selected for use runs out of paper. This function runs for 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for 60 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function continues until the adjustments end or the Stop Key is pressed.

This output should never be adjusted as it is only for factory setting.

By pressing the Start Key, the Scanner moves approx. 50 mm and the Exposure Lamp is lit.

F4 Adjustment of High Voltage Unit HV1 output for Paper Separator Corona

This output should never be adjusted as it is only for factory setting.

1. Press the Start Key. F5 Grid voltage 2. Grid voltage adjustment (with the Exposure adjustment/manual Lamp off, a solid black pattern is made on optimum exposure the PC Drum by the Image Erase Lamp). adjustment/automatic 3. With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan is AE Sensor performed once. adjustment 4. Manual optimum exposure adjustment (the Exposure Lamp lights up and the half tone pattern on the back of the Original Scale is made on the PC Drum). 5. With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan is performed once. 6. With the Exposure Lamp on, the Scanner moves approx. 50 mm from the Original Scale and comes to a stop. 7. Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (white level) 8. Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (half tone level) 9. The Exposure Lamp goes off and a test scan is performed once. F6 Image Erase Lamp ON/OFF confirmation (Edit position adjustment) F7 Automatic Original Size Detecting Sensor adjustment F8 Automatic ATDC Sensor adjustment After warming-up is complete, press the Start Key to switch the Image Erase Lamp ON/OFF to make a checkered pattern. (The Exposure Lamp is off.) With the Original Cover or ADF closed, press the Start Key to start the operation. The Developing Unit is energized to agitate the developer, allowing the Tech. Rep. to adjust the ATDC Sensor. Note: This function is only used to load or Note: change the starter. Automatic ATDC/AE Sensor adjustment Note: This function is only used to load or Note: change the starter.

This function runs for one copy cycle.

This function continues until the adjustment ends. This function runs for about 3 minutes or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for about 3 minutes 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed.

FF F8+F5

FF: Can be selected by pressing the Multi-Copy Keys "1", "5".

S-10

Components Energized in the Function Mode O : Energized, Set Mode F1 Component Main Drive Motor Fan Motors (Suction, Original Glass Cooling) Synchronizing Rollers Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas Paper Separator Corona, Developing Bias Exposure Lamp Main Erase Lamp Image Erase Lamp Toner Replenishing Motors (Main, Sub) Paper Separator Finger Paper Feed Jam detection Malfunction detection Scan O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FF blank: Not energized

S-11

3-3. Tech. Rep. Choice Mode


This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to make various settings and adjustments, including copy
charge counter settings, according to the needs of the user. Setting procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Tech. Rep. Choice". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Plug-In Counter : # of Sheets # of Copy Cycles


1136S159CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, select the Choice Mode in which you want to change or confirm the setting. 7) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen. 8) To enter the setting, press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key.

S-12

Description of Tech. Rep. Choice Modes Code SCH-00 SCH-01 SCH-02 SCH-04 SCH-05 Choice Mode Name Plug-In Counter Mode Paper Size Counter Mode Total Counter Mode Description Allows the counting mode (number of sheets or number of copy cycles) to be set for use of the Plug-In Counter. Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size basis. Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size/copy mode basis.

Maintenance Call Allows the ON/OFF setting of the maintenance call Reminder ON/OFF Mode reminder message shown on the Message Display. Copy Kit Counter Mode Allows the YES/NO setting of the Copy Kit Counter counting, and the setting of copying enable/disable at the end of counting.

SCH-15

Toner Empty Stop Mode Allows the setting of copying enable/disable on detection of a toner-empty condition. * When copying disable is set, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle when the toner-to-carrier ratio becomes less than about 2.5% after a toner-empty condition has been detected. Automatic Paper Mode Leading Edge Erase Mode Trailing Edge Erase Mode Loop Length Adjustment Mode (Drawer Feeding) Loop Length Adjustment Mode (Manual Feeding) Exposure Lamp Voltage Adjustment Mode ATDC Detection Level Mode Allows the setting of the paper size selected on a priority basis in the Automatic Paper Selection Mode. Selects whether to erase the leading edge or not. Selects whether to erase the trailing edge or not. Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers. Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers. Fine-adjusts the Exposure Lamp voltage. Selects the level at which the ATDC Sensor functions to maintain a target toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer.

SCH-17 SCH-20 SCH-21 SCH-23 SCH-24 SCH-70 SCH-90

S-13

Choice Modes and Settings The screen displayed in each mode is shown below. Note that the cursor on the screen indicates the initial setting.

SCH-00

Plug-In Counter : # of Sheets # of Copy Cycles


1136S159CA

SCH-01

(Inch Area)

(Metric Area)

Size Counter : NO 11x17 +Legal +11x14


1136S160EA

Size Counter : NO A3 A3 / B4
1136S122DA

SCH-02

Total Counter : Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3


1136S161CA

Screen Display Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Description 1 count per 1 copy cycle Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode

* Counting methods of the total and size counters are according to the combination of the above
count modes. Copy Mode SCH-01 SCH-02
Total (Electronic/Mechanical) Size (Electronic) Two-Sided Total (Electronic) Two-Sided Size (Electronic) SCH-00 Plug-In (Mechanical) # of sheets # of copy cycles

1-Sided Sizes other than those set in SCH-01 Sizes set in SCH-01

2-Sided Sizes other than those set in SCH-01 Sizes set in SCH-01 Manual Feeding

Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

1 0 0 0 1 1

1 1

2 1 0 0

2 2 1

2 0 1 0 2

2 2 1 1 2 1 2

4 2 1 1 4 4

4 0 4 4 4 4

1 0 0 0 1 1 4: 4 counts

1 1

2 2

2 2

2 2

0: No count

1: 1 count

2: 2 counts

S-14

Setting of Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (SCH-00, SCH-02) When the D-102 Is Installed on the Copier If the D-102 is fitted to the copier, Tech. Rep. Choice Modes SCH-00 and SCH-02 must be set as follows according to the count-up mode of the D-102. Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (Copier) Count-Up Mode (D-102) All Size Mode Size Mode I Size Mode II Full Color Mode I Mono Color Mode I Special Mode I 2-Sided Mode I 2-Sided Mode II Full Color Mode II Mono Color Mode II Special Mode II Plug-In Counter Mode SCH-00 # of sheets # of copy cycles O Total Counter Mode SCH-02 Mode 1 O Mode 2 O

O : Setting acceptable : Setting inhibited Note: If a setting is made for the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode where it is inhibited, an error could result in the count data of the D-102.

SCH-04

Maintenance Call YES NO


1136S162CA

SCH-05

Copy Kit Counter : Mode 1 NO Mode 2


1136S123CA

Screen Display NO Mode 1 Mode 2 No count

Description

Copy enabled at the end of counting. Copy disabled at the end of counting.

S-15

SCH-15

Toner Empty : Disable Copy Enable Copy


1136S163CA

SCH-17

(Inch Area)

(Metric Area)

Auto Paper Config Inch / Metric Inch


1136S170EA

Auto Paper Config Metric / Inch Metric


1136S124DA

Screen Display Metric/Inch (Metric Area) Metric (Inch Area) Inch

Description The copier automatically selects metric or inch paper for the original detected. The copier automatically selects metric paper for all originals detected. The copier automatically selects inch paper for all originals detected.

SCH-20

Leading Edge : Erase Not Erase


1136S164CA

Note: When "Erase" is selected, the erase width is approx. 3 mm.

SCH-21

Trailing Edge : Erase Not Erase


1136S165CA

Note: When "Erase" is selected, the erase width is approx. 3 mm.

SCH-23

Loop Adj (Drawer) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3


1136S166CA

Note: 1. "" indicates that the loop length is decreased. 2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.

S-16

SCH-24

Loop Adj (Manual) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3


1136S167CA

Note: 1. "" indicates that the loop length is decreased. 2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.

SCH-70

Exp. Lamp Manual Adjust : 50(44-56)


1136S168CA

To change the code on the screen: 1. Press the Clear Key. 2. Enter the code number with the Multi-Copy Keys. Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Variable Voltage Value 6V 5V 4V 3V 2V 1V Standard value +1V +2V +3V +4V +5V +6V

Note: After making the above Exposure Lamp fine-adjustment, the "F5" mode must be executed.

S-17

SCH-90

ATDC Level -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
1136S169CA

Code 3 2 1

T/C Ratio 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% 7.0% 7.5% 8.0%

0
1 2 3 4

0: Initial setting

S-18

3-4. Paper Size Input Mode


This mode is used to enter the size (length/width: mm) of the paper used in each drawer.
Entry procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2 1136S143C


2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode. 1136S144C


3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Paper Size Input". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Paper Size Input 1 2 1136S147C


6) Press the OK Key to select the Paper Source Number for which you want to change or confirm the paper size. (See below.) Europe Area USA, Canada Area

1 2 3 4 5

1 2

1136S001AA

1136S002AA

S-19

7) Press the Cursor Key to change the paper size displayed on the screen in the following sequence. To define the paper size, press the OK Key or the Panel Reset Key. Paper Size Values (mm) Length (F) F: A3 A4 A4 A5 B4 B5 B5 B6 11" 17" 11" 14" LEGAL LETTER LETTER 5-1/2" 8-1/2" FLS C: Width (C)

Paper Size Display

Use the Multi-Copy Keys (Free setting)


420 297 210 210 364 257 182 182 432 356 356 279 216 216 330 297 210 297 148 257 182 257 128 279 279 216 216 279 140 210

8) For free setting, enter the paper size values by the following procedure: a) Select the paper size display "F" C: ". b) Press the OK Key once. (The paper size entry is enabled.) c) Using the Cursor Key, select "F" (length) or "C" (width). d) Using the Clear Key, clear the paper size. e) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter a new paper size.

Note: Free setting is mainly used when it is impossible to judge whether or not standard size paper is loaded in the Drawer. By measuring the size of that paper and entering the values, the standard size paper nearest to those values is selected and shown on the Message Display.

S-20

3-5. System Setting Mode


This mode is used to change or set the fixed zoom ratio, Plug-In Counter or D-102 use, and the
marketing area according to the users needs. A. Changing the fixed zoom ratio 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2 1136S143C


2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode. 1136S144C


3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "System Input". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Change Fixed Zoom Ratio : 1.000 x 1136S150C . 0


6) Using any of the Reduction, Enlargement or Full Size Keys, select a desired fixed zoom ratio. 7) Then, using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter the desired zoom ratio. The zoom value entered can be cleared by the Clear Key. 8) Press the OK Key to enter the zoom ratio.

S-21

B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2 1136S143C


2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode. 1136S144C


3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "System Input". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Change Fixed Zoom Ratio : 1.000 x 1136S150C . 0


6) Press the OK Key once. 7) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Plug-In Counter : YES NO 1136S151C


8) Using the Cursor Key, select either "YES" or "NO", and press the OK key to enter it. Screen Display YES NO Description The Plug-In Counter or D-102 is used. The Plug-In Counter or D-102 is not used. Initial Setting

S-22

C. Setting the marketing area 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2 1136S143C


2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode. 1136S144C


3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "System Input". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Change Fixed Zoom Ratio : 1.000 x 1136S150C . 0


6) Press the OK Key twice. 7) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Marketing Area : MJ MC MH Others 1136S152C


8) Using the Cursor Key, select the marketing area and press the OK key to enter it. 9) Press the Panel Reset Key to return to the initial screen and initialize the copier to set the marketing area.

S-23

3-6. Counter Mode


This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to show or set the counts of various counters.
Procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select the desired counter from the following list: Types of Counters Items on Card Paper Jam Retry Trouble Maintenance Port Consumables Auto CPU Reset Counter Name Paper Counter Jam Counter Feed Retry Counter Trouble Counter Maintenance Counter Port Counter Consumables Counter Auto CPU Reset Counter Description Counts the number of sheets used on a paper size/type basis. Counts the number of jams per section. Counts the number of feed retries per port. Counts the number of malfunctions per trouble code. Used to show and set maintenance timing based on copy cycle. Counts the number of feed/passage/use times per port. Used to show and set the life of consumables based on copy cycle. Used to identify the presence/absence of automatic CPU reset for specific elements.

S-24

Screen Display/Type/Setting Method for Each Counter

Press the OK Key to switch from one screen to another. To move the cursor on the screen, use the Cursor Key. To clear the count, use the Clear Key. To return the counter to the count it had before clearing, use the Interrupt Key. To input the counter setting, use the Multi-Copy Keys after pressing the Clear Key (for the To enter the counter setting, use the OK Key or Panel Reset Key.
A. Paper Counter Maintenance, Port and Consumables Counters only).

Paper Counter : A3 B4
1136S190CA

OK Key

Paper Type : S0 S1
1136S195CA

A4 B5 A5
1136S191CA

OK Key

S2 S3
1136S196CA

OK Key

B6 11"x17" 11"x14"
1136S192CA

Screen Display S0 S1 S2 S3

Description Standard paper Recycled paper Special paper (insertion) Reused paper (2-sided disabled paper)

OK Key

Legal Letter 812" x512"


1136S193CA

OK Key

FLS
1136S194CA

OK Key

* For such a paper size as A4 which can be loaded both lengthwise and crosswise, its count
represents the sum of both.

S-25

B. Jam Counter

Jam Counter : MCBJ 1 MCBJ 2


OK Key
1136S212CA

PC Drum Exit Sorter


OK Key
1136S216CA

Manual 1st 2nd


OK Key
1136S213CA

ADF
1136S217CA

3rd 4th 5th


OK Key
1136S214CA

1 2 3 4 5

Europe Area

Dup Ent. Dup Exit. Trans.


OK Key
1136S215CA
1 2 3

1136S001AA

USA, Canada Area

1136S002AA

Screen Display MCBJ 1 MCBJ 2 Manual 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

Description Jam occurrence ratio in the system (See Note) Jam occurrence ratio in the copier only (See Note) Number of jams that occurred at the Manual Feed Section Number of jams that occurred at the 1st Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 2nd Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 3rd Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 4th Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 5th Drawer

Screen Display Dup Ent. Dup Exit Trans. PC Drum Exit Sorter ADF

Description Number of jams that occurred at the Duplex Unit Entry Number of jams that occurred at the Duplex Unit Exit Number of jams that occurred in the Transport section Number of jams that occurred in the PC Drum section Number of jams that occurred at the Exit section Number of jams that occurred in the Sorter Number of jams that occurred in the ADF

Note: MCBJ = Total Counter value Jam Counter value. When no jam has occurred, "------" is displayed.

S-26

C. Feed Retry Counter

Retry Counter : 1st 2nd


1136S218CA

OK Key

3rd 4th 5th


1136S219CA

OK Key

Dup
1136S220CA

Screen Display 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Dup

Description Number of feed retries in the 1st Drawer Number of feed retries in the 2nd Drawer Number of feed retries in the 3rd Drawer Number of feed retries in the 4th Drawer Number of feed retries in the 5th Drawer Number of feed retries in the Duplex Unit

S-27

D. Trouble Counter

OK Key

1136S197CA

C0998-d C0E0x C0E2x


OK Key
1136S204CA

C004A/b C004C/d C0070/1


OK Key
1136S198CA

C0F0x C0F10 C0F20


OK Key
1136S205CA

C0200 C03xx C04xx


OK Key
1136S199CA

C0F30 C0F79 C0FE/Fx


OK Key
1136S206CA

C050x C051x C052x


OK Key
1136S200CA

C0b0x C0b1x C0b3x


OK Key
1136S207CA

C060x C061x C0620


OK Key
1136S201CA

C0b5x C0b6x C0b7x


OK Key
1136S208CA

C0650 C0660 C06Fx


OK Key
1136S202CA

C0d00 C0d20 C0d5x


1136S209CA

C090x C095x C0990-6


OK Key
1136S203CA

S-28

Screen Display C000x C0040/1 C004A/b C004C/d C0070/1 C0072 C0200 C03xx C04xx C050x C051x C052x C060x C061x C062x C0650 C0660 C06Fx C090x

Description (Element/Cause) Main Drive Motor malfunction Suction Fan Motor malfunction Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor malfunction

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction Drum Charge Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona malfunction Master Board, Harness malfunction Exposure Lamp malfunction Warming-up malfunction Abnormally low fusing temperature Abnormally high fusing temperature Scanner Drive Section malfunction Lens Drive Section malfunction Mirror Drive Section malfunction Scanner Detecting Section malfunction Scanner Load Section malfunction Scanner Interface malfunction 3rd Drawer lift-up malfunction

S-29

Screen Display C095x C09906 C0998d C0E0x C0E2x C0F0x C0F10 C0F2x C0F3x C0F79 C0FE/Fx C0b0x C0b1x C0b3x C0b5x C0b6x C0b7x C0d00 C0d20 C0d5x

Description (Element/Cause) 4th Drawer lift-up malfunction Main Drawer malfunction (PF102) Shift Drawer malfunction (PF102) Main Erase malfunction Image Erase malfunction Original Size Detecting Board malfunction AE Board malfunction AIDC Sensor malfunction ATDC Sensor malfunction Paper Empty Sensor/Board malfunction (PF102) Original Size Detecting Sensor malfunction Drive Section malfunction (S-104/205, ST-101/206) Paper Clamp malfunction (ST-101/206) Paper Aligning Motor malfunction (ST-101/206) Stapler malfunction (ST-101/206) Bin movement malfunction (ST-104/205, ST-101/206) Punch malfunction (ST-206) Front/Rear Edge Guide operation malfunction (AD-5) Gate operation malfunction (AD-5) Drive Motor malfunction (AD-5)

S-30

E. Maintenance Counter

Maint. Counter 1 : Count Set


1136S221CA

OK Key

Maint. Counter 4 : Count Set


1136S224CA

Maint. Counter 2 : Count Set


1136S222CA

OK Key

OK Key

Maint. Counter 5 : Count Set


1136S225CA

Maint. Counter 3 : Count Set


1136S223CA

OK Key Screen Display Count Setting Description 1 count per 1 copy Set the maintenance time based on copy cycle count. (Max. 6 digits)

* The above Maintenance Counters 1 to 5 can be used as desired. * When the count exceeds the settings, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come. (When Maintenance Call "YES" has been selected in the Maintenance Call Mode of the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode)

Maintenance 1
1136S071CA

Maintenance call display resetting method To reset the maintenance call display, clear the count after inspection (cleaning or replacement).

S-31

F. Port/Option Counter

Port / Option : 1st 2nd


OK Key
1136S184CA

Dup Sorter Stapler


OK Key
1136S187CA

3rd 4th 5th


OK Key
1136S185CA

Punch PC Drum Starter


OK Key
1136S188CA

Manual ADF Ent. ADF Rev.


OK Key
1136S186CA

Fuser

1136S189CA

Screen Display 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Manual ADF Ent. ADF Rev.

Description Number of sheets fed from the 1st Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 2nd Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 3rd Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 4th Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 5th Drawer Number of sheets fed from the Manual Feed Section Number of sheets that passed the ADF Entry Number of sheets that passed the ADF Turnover section

Screen Display Dup Sorter Stapler Punch

Description Number of paper take-up cycles in the Duplex Unit Number of sheets that passed through the Sorter Number of stapling cycles Number of punching cycles

PC Drum Number of PC Drum cycles Starter Fuser Number of developing cycles (copy cycles) Number of Fusing Roller cycles

* 1000 revolutions of the PC Drum or Fusing Rollers are counted as 1 cycle.

S-32

G. Consumables Counter

Toner Collecting Count Set


OK Key
1136S226CA

Copy Kit : Count Set


1136S228CA

Screen Display Toner Collecting Count Setting 1 count per 1 copy

Description

Set the number of copy cycles from after toner disposal to the next maintenance time.

* The maximum setting is 6 digits. * When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come.

Maintenance 2
1136S072CA

Screen Display Count Copy Kit Setting 1 count per 1 copy

Description

Set the number of copy cycles from after copy kit replacement to the next maintenance time.

* The maximum setting is 6 digits. * The count of the copy kit is not made unless "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" has been selected in the Copy
Kit Counter Mode.

* When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come.

Maintenance 4
1136S073CA

Screen display resetting method To reset the screen display, clear the count after inspection (disposal or replacement).

S-33

H. Auto CPU Reset Counter

Auto CPU Reset 1 2 3 4 5 6


1136S211CA

If automatic CPU resets have occurred, the corresponding numerals are highlighted.
Example:

Auto CPU Reset 1 2 3 4 5 6


1136S125CA

Indicates that automatic CPU resets occurred in the Elements corresponding to "2" and "5".

Clearing procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select the numeral corresponding to the occurrence of the automatic CPU reset. 2) Using the Clear Key, restore the highlighted numeral to normal. Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 Element MSC, Control Panel (Copier) Master Board (Copier) SCP (Copier) Automatic Document Feeder (AF-3, AFR-7) Sorter (S-104/205, ST-101/206) Data Controller (D-102)

S-34

3-7. ROM Version Mode


This mode is used to show the version numbers of the ROMs installed in the copier and options.
Procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "ROM Version". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

ROM Version MSC+Panel


1136S153CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

ROM Version MSC+Panel


OK Key
1136S153CA

ROM Version SCP


OK Key
1136S156CA

ROM Version Master


OK Key
1136S154CA

ROM Version ADF


OK Key
1136S157CA

ROM Version Sorter


OK Key
1136S155CA

ROM Version Data Controller


1136S158CA

S-35

3-8. ADF Setting Mode


This mode is used to adjust the document stop position of the ADF.
Procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "ADF Setting". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

ADF Doc. Stop Position (1-sided) 50(43-58)


1136S171CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

ADF Doc. Stop Position (1-sided) 50(43-58)


OK Key
1136S171CA

ADF Doc. Stop Position : (2-in-1) 50(43-58)


OK Key
1136S173CA

ADF Doc. Stop Position (2-sided) 50(43-58)


OK Key
1136S172CA

ADF Docs. Spacing : (2-in-1) 50(43-58)


1136S174CA

S-36

Setting changing procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the mode in which you want to change the setting. 2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting. 3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting. (See the following table.) 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the setting. Setting 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm Direction in which the document stop position moves away from the Original Scale 7 mm 6 mm 5 mm 4 mm 3 mm 2 mm 1 mm Initial value Direction in which the document stop position overlaps the Original Scale Description

S-37

3-9. Security Mode


This mode is used to register the administrator number (identification number) required in the
Security Mode of the Users Choice Mode. Registration procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.

Tech. Rep. Card 1: Select the desired mode.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Security Mode". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Input Admin. # :

1136S261CA

6) Press the Clear Key and input a 4-digit administrator number (0000 to 9999) using the Multi-Copy Keys. 7) Press the OK Key to enter the administrator number. 8) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

User Help Copy Track


1136S118CA

Note: After entering the administrator number, the screen changes depending on the mode selected. For more information, see the Administrator Mode in the Users Choice Mode.

S-38

3-10. I/O Check


This mode causes the state of the drive and electrical parts to be shown on the Control Panel at
the occurrence of a jam, malfunction, etc. so that the cause of a fault may be checked easily and safely. Making this I/O check can identify whether the cause of a fault lies in the PWBs or not, thereby preventing unnecessary PWB replacement and reducing maintenance costs. Setting procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "2" to select Tech. Rep. Card-2.

Tech. Rep. Card 2: Select the desired mode.


1136S145CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up. 4) Select any of the following modes: Mode Name Description Displays the data of the input/output ports of the PWBs in a machine standby state. Input port data: L, H; Output port data: 0, 1 Port The output port data can be changed by the Multi-Copy Keys. (0 1, 10) By changing the output port data, operation checks can be made on the drive parts. The input port data is changed by causing the sensor to be activated by paper. (Used to check the function of the sensor.) Paper Path Sensor The actual passage of paper causes the activated states (1 0) of the Paper Path Sensors to be displayed in order of paper passage. Self-diagnoses of the Master Board. Control Board If the result of self-diagnoses is not acceptable, trouble code "C03" is shown on the Message Display. Used to check the ON/OFF state of the Control Panel LEDs and Message Display indicators. Panel Indication Press any of the keys on the Control Panel to check whether the key pressed is detected or not. (Every time the key is pressed, the corresponding code number is displayed on the screen.) Checks the addresses of the RAM and ROM on the MSC Board to judge whether the RAM and ROM are normal or not.

Memory

S-39

Port Procedure 1) Select "Port". 2)The following screen appears on the Message Display.

IC Port Data : P0 P1
1136S244CA

3) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

IC Port Data : P0 P1
Press the OK Key twice.
1136S244CA

P2 P3 P4
Press the OK Key three times.
1136S245CA

P5 P6 P7
Press the OK Key three times.
1136S246CA

P47 P48 P49


Press the OK Key three times.
1136S266CA

Tech. Rep. Card 2: Select the desired mode.


1136S145CA

S-40

Actual Ports and Their Boards Corresponding to the Screen Display Numbers Copier Screen Display No. P P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 Ports Board

P47 P57 P67 P87

P46 P56 P66 P86

P45 P55 P65 P85

P44 P54 P64 P84

P43 P53 P63 P83

P42 P52 P62 P82

P41 P51 P61 P81

P40 P50 P60 P80

Master Board IC1A

APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0 Master Board IC4A

APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0 Master Board IC5A

S-41

Cabinet Screen Display No. P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 PB3 PB2 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1 Ports PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0 Board

1
PF-202 Control Board IC1A

PF3

PF2

PB3

PB2


PB3


PB2


PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1


PB0 PC0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0


PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3


PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2


PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1


PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0

PF-202 Control Board IC2A

PF3

PF2

PF-2D Control Board IC1A

PB3

PB2

PF-2D Control Board IC2A

1: Except USA, Canada Area

S-42

Screen Display No. P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 P48 P49 PB3 PB2 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1

Ports PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0

Board PF-102 Control Board IC1A

PF3

PF2

PB3

PB2


PB3


PB2


PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1


PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0


PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3


PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2


PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1


PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0

PF-102 Control Board IC2A

PF3

PF2

AD-5 Control Board IC1G

PB3

PB2

PF3

PF2

2: Japan Area Only

S-43

Changing the Output Port Data 1) Output port data that may be changed is underlined. By moving this underline with the Cursor Key, define the data desired to be changed. Example:

P P P

0001LLHL 0110LL01 LLHLL111


1136S148CA

2) By pressing the Multi-Copy Key "0" or "1", the data defined is changed (01, 10). (At this time, the drive part operates.) 3) The data changed is held for approx. 5 seconds and then returns to the original data. 4) By pressing the OK Key, move to the next "P".

Changing the Input Port Data 1) To change data corresponding to a sensor where data can be entered intentionally, activate the sensor using paper. 2) Change the changeable output port data which is located in the same column as the port of the sensor activated. 3) After the output port data has returned to the original data, the input port data of the sensor is changed. Example:

P P P

0001LLHL 0110LL01 LLHLL111


1136S149CA

Note: When there is no output port in the same column or when the data of the output port in the same column cannot be changed, activate the sensor, then terminate the I/O Check Port Mode once, and select the Port Mode again. This changes the input port data of the sensor.

S-44

Paper Path Sensor 1) Select "Passage Sensor". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Paper Path Sens. 123456789ABCDE


1136S254CB

Sensor Code Sensor State (0: Blocked, 1: Not Blocked)

3) By passing paper, the activated state of each Paper Path Sensor changes (1 0) in order of paper passage. Note: To select the paper port, use the Paper Select Key.

Sensor Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

Sensor Name 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

Vertical Transport Sensor 3 Vertical Transport Sensor 4 Transport Roller Sensor Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor Paper Exit Switch Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor

S-45

Control Board 1) Select "Control Board". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Controller Board Check : Press OK to start


1136S255CA

3) Press the OK Key to self-diagnose Master Board and Cabinet Control Board faults. When the result of the self-diagnosis is acceptable: When the result of the self-diagnosis is unacceptable:

Tech. Rep. Card 2: Select the desired mode.


1136S145CA

Call your Technical Rep. : Code : CO3


1136S076CA

Panel Indication 1) Select "Panel Indication". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Panel Indication Check : Press OK to start


1136S256CA

3) By pressing the OK Key, the LEDs on the Control Panel and the Indicators on the Message Display are all lit and then go off in sequence. 4) After all the LEDs and indications have gone off, the following screen appears on the Message Display:

Panel Key Check : Press OK to finish


1136S259CA

5) By pressing any of the Keys on the Control Panel, the code number of the corresponding Key indicated on the following page is shown in the area marked on the Message Display. Note: Press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key to leave the Panel Indication Mode.

S-46

Code No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Key Name Multi-Copy Key "1" Multi-Copy Key "2" Multi-Copy Key "3" Multi-Copy Key "4" Multi-Copy Key "5" Multi-Copy Key "6" Multi-Copy Key "7" Multi-Copy Key "8" Multi-Copy Key "9" Multi-Copy Key "0" Clear Key Energy Saver Key Interrupt Key Panel Reset Key Access Mode Key Start Key Paper Select Key Auto Paper Mode Key Zoom Up Key Zoom Down Key

Code No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 35 36 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

Key Name Exposure Control Key (Lighter) Exposure Control Key (Darker) Auto Exposure Mode Key Enlargement Key Full Size Key Reduction Key OK Key Cursor Key DT Setting (Drum Dehumidify Key) Counter Clear (Book Mode Key) Port (File Margin Mode Key) Memory (Erase Mode Key) Initial Transmission (Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key) Data Load (Insertion Mode Key) Level History (Cover Mode Key) Card-2Card-1 (Meter Count Key) Tech. Rep. ID Code (Manual Staple Key) Mixed Original Detection Mode Key Original Count Mode Key Memory Input Key

S-47

Memory 1) Select "Memory". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Memory Check : Press OK to start


1136S257CA

3) By pressing the OK Key, the following screen appears on the Message Display:

ROM XX RAM XX Turn the main SW OFF, and then ON


1136S258CA

4) 5) 6) 7)

"OK" or "NG" is shown in the area marked on the Message Display. "OK" indicates that the Power Switch should be turned OFF, then ON. "ROM NG" indicates that the ROM on the PWB-B should be changed. "RAM NG" indicates that the PWB-B should be changed.

S-48

3-11. Level History


This mode is used to show the operating levels of given functions, or to enter necessary control
settings to maintain copy quality. Setting procedure 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "2" to select Tech. Rep. Card-2.

Tech. Rep. Card 2: Select the desired mode.


1136S145CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up. 4) Select "Level History". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Vg Level : Initial Corr.


1136S236CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

Vg Level : Initial Corr.


OK Key
1136S227CA

Toner Replenishing Time min.


OK Key
1136S239CA

ATDC Level : Set Current , %


OK Key
1136S237CB

Fuser Temp. : Set C Current C


1136S240CA

Exp. Lamp Level : Initial Corr.


OK Key
1136S238CA

S-49

Level History Display Level Vg level (Read Only) ATDC level (Can reset) Description Data Value Display/Setting Range 550 to 850 (step: 30) 550 to 850 (step: 30) 2 to 254 (step: 2) 1.0 to 9.0 (step: 0.5) 49 to 71 (step: 1) Unit V V % V

Initial value Initial setting of grid voltage Correction Correction value of grid voltage value due to changes with time, etc. Setting Current value Initial value Initial setting of ATDC level Current ATDC level value (T/C ratio) Initial setting of Exposure Lamp voltage

Exposure lamp level (Read Only)

Correction value of Lamp Correction voltage due to changes with value time (deterioration, etc.) Total (cumulative) time of toner replenishment Temperature control setting Current temperature control value

49 to 71 (step: 1)

Toner replenishing time (Read Only) Fuser temperature (Can reset) Setting Current value

0 to 1270 (step: 10) 175, 185, 195 160, 165 to 225 (step: 10)

min C C

Only the setting for the ATDC level and Fuser temperature can be entered.
The purpose and procedure for entry are given below: Purpose of entry ATDC level setting

When the RAM Board is changed or the P/C Unit used has been exchanged for
one from another machine: Enter the ATDC level reference value given on the Factory Setting Label found inside the front door.

Fuser temperature setting

When a fusing malfunction has occurred due to the environment or paper used:
Enter a value within the setting range (175, 185, 195).

Entry procedure 1) Call "ATDC Level" or "Fuser Temp." onto the screen. 2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting. 3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a value within the data setting range. 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the value.

S-50

4 ADJUST MODE
Adjust mode setting procedure 1) Open the System Panel. 2) Press the Stop Key. 3) Press Multi-Copy Key "0". 4) Press the Stop Key. 5) Press Multi-Copy Key "1". 6) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Please input the Card Number : 1 or 2


7) Press Multi-Copy Key "1". 8) Press the Stop Key. 9) Press the Start Key. 10) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

1136S143CA

Lens Focus : (A 0) (49-51)


Lens Focus : (A 0) (49-51)
1136S175CA

1136S175CA

11) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

OK Key

Feed Direction Mag. Ratio : (A 3) (46-54)


1136S178CA

Lens Full Size Position : (A 1) (43-58)


1136S176CA

OK Key

OK Key

Lens Position Full Size : (A 4) (40-60)


1136S179CA

Mirror Full Size Position : (A 2) (43-58)


1136S177CA

OK Key

OK Key

Lens Position Reduction : (A 5) (40-60)


1136S180CA

OK Key

S-51

Book B-Scan Regist : (A 6) (45-55)


1136S181CA

OK Key

Lens Position Enlargement (A 11) (40-60)


1136S182CA

OK Key

Leading Edge Erase : (A 12) (45-55)


1136S183CA

OK Key

Trailing Edge Erase : (A 13) (42-58)


1136S126CA

S-52

NOTE When the RAM Board has been changed or memory cleared, the setting of each Adjust Mode must be returned to the factory setting indicated on the Factory Setting Label inside the Front Door.

Setting entry procedure 1) Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting. 2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting. 3) Press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key to enter the value. Types of Adjust Modes Code A-0 A-1 A-2 Mode Name Lens Focal Length Adjustment Lens Full Size Position Adjustment Mirror Full Size Position Adjustment Feeding Direction Magnification Ratio Adjustment Lens Position Full Size Registration Lens Position Reduction Registration Book B Scan Registration Description Corrects the focal length of the Lens. (For factory setting only) Adjusts the magnification ratio in the crosswise direction by finely adjusting the Lens home position. Corrects the conjugate length of the Mirror. (For factory setting only) Adjusts the magnification ratio in the feeding direction by finely adjusting the scan speed. Registers the leading edge for full size. Registers the leading edge for reduction. Registers the leading edge on scan B side for the Book Mode.

A-3

A-4 A-5 A-6 A-11 A-12 A-13

Lens Position Registers the leading edge for enlargement. Enlargement Registration Leading Edge Erase Adjustment Trailing Edge Erase Adjustment Corrects the width of erase on the leading edge of an image. Corrects the width of erase on the trailing edge of an image.

S-53

A-0
Setting 49 50 51 Description Short focal length adjustment Standard Long focal length adjustment O When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

A-1
Setting 43 ~ Correction: 0 steps ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~

Correction: +12 steps Correction: +14 steps Correction: +16 steps ~ O

58

Correction: +30 steps (Increments: 0.4 mm/2 steps)

A-2
Setting 43 ~ Correction: 0 steps ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~

Correction: +18 steps Correction: +21 steps Correction: +24 steps ~ O

58

Correction: +45 steps (Increments: 3 steps)

S-54

A-3
Setting 46 ~ Correction: 16/1,000 Correction: 4/1,000 Correction: 0 Correction: +4/1,000 ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 54

Correction: +16/1,000 (Increments: 1.2mm)

A-4
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 60

Correction: +10 pulses (Increments: 0.4 mm/1 pulse)

S-55

A-5
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 60

Correction: +10 pulses (Increments: 0.2 mm/1 pulse)

A-6
Setting 45 ~ Correction: 5 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 55

Correction: +5 pulses (Increments: 0.4 mm/1 pulse)

S-56

A-11
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 60

Correction: +10 pulses (Increments: 0.8 mm/1 pulse)

A-12
Setting 45 ~ Correction: 5 mm Correction: 1mm Correction: 0 mm Correction: +1 mm ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~ 55

Correction: +5 mm (Increments: 1 mm)

S-57

A-13
Setting 42 ~ Correction: -8 mm ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared

49 50 51 ~

Correction: 1 mm Correction: 0 mm Correction: +1 mm ~ O

58

Correction: +8 mm (Increments: 1 mm)

S-58

5 USERS CHOICE MODE


The Users Choice Mode is used to program the copier (make priority and other settings) Use the Users Choice Card to set the Users Choice Mode.
Users Choice Card according to the users particular needs.

2in1

Security Mode

Language Select

Book Mode
2in1

Separation

Custom Auto Exp. Level Counter Removal Manual Exp. Adjust Copy Mode Priority Finishing Priority Energy Saver Mode Auto Panel Reset

Intelligent Sort

Mixed Orig. Detect Original Thickness

Tray Priority Exposure Priority

Drum Dehumidify Special Paper

Enter:Press and hold Quit :Press key.

key for 3 seconds.

OK

User's Choice Card


1136S267CA

Setting procedure 1) Open the System Panel. 2) Place the Users Choice Card onto the Supplementary Panel. 3) Hold down the Panel Reset Key for about 3 seconds. 4) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

User' s Choice : Select a mode to Change settings.


1136S103CA

5) By selecting the mode you want to set from among the items on the Users Choice Card, the corresponding Users Choice Mode is accessed. 6) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen. 7) To enter the setting, press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key. Resetting method Press the Panel Reset Key. Remove the Users Choice Card and close the System Panel.

S-59

Types of Users Choice Modes Mode Language Select Mixed Orig. Detect Original Thickness Copy Mode Priority Description Used to select the language shown on the Message Display. Used to set whether originals of assorted sizes can be used or not when the Automatic Document Feeder is used. Used to set whether lightweight originals can be used or not when the Automatic Document Feeder is used. Used to set the priority mode selected automatically (Auto Paper Select/Auto Magnification Select/Manual) when the Power Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed. Used to set the paper port selected automatically for the Auto Paper Select or Manual Mode. Used to set the priority exposure mode (Manual/Auto) selected when the Power Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed. *The exposure level can also be set for manual exposure. Used to set the priority finishing mode (Non Sort/Sort/Group/Staple) when the Power Switch is turned ON with the copier equipped with the Sorter. Used to set the priority exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode when the copier has been set so that the Auto Exposure mode is selected in the initial mode.

Paper Priority Exposure Priority

Finishing Priority Auto Exp. Level

Manual Expo. Adjust Used to set the priority exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode when the copier has been set so that the Manual Exposure mode is selected in the initial mode. Counter Removal Intelligent Sort Used to set whether the Control Panel is to be reset or not when the Plug-In Counter is removed. Used to set whether switching to Sort or Non-Sort is automatically made according to the number of originals/copy cycles when the copier is equipped with a Sorter and Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder. Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the Energy Saving Mode a given length of time after a copy cycle has ended. *When YES has been selected, the time may be entered. Used to set whether or not the Control Panel is automatically initialized a given length of time after a copy cycle has ended. *When YES has been selected, the time may be entered. Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the Drum Dehumidify Mode after the copier has completed warming up. Used to designate special types of paper loaded in each Drawer for the Automatic Paper Size Mode and automatic paper source switching function. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the 2-in-1 mode is selected. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the Book mode is selected. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the 2-in-1 Separation mode is selected. Used to enter the User Help Code, send the Code to the center, set whether Copy Track is performed or not, set the maximum limit to the number of copy cycles set with the Multi-Copy Keys, register/change the Access No., and clear the Account Counter.

Energy Saver Mode

Auto Panel Reset

Drum Dehumidify Special Paper Custom 2-in-1 Custom Book Mode Custom 2-in-1 Separation Administrator Mode

S-60

Settings in Users Choice Modes The following screen is displayed in each Mode. Note that the Cursor on the screen indicates the initial setting. Language Select USA, Canada Area Europe Area

Language Select : English French Spanish Portug.


1136S116EA

Language Select : German English French Duch


1136S117DA

Mixed Orig. Detect

Mixed Orig. Size: YES NO


Orig. Thickness
1136S106CA

Orig. Thickness : Thin Standard


Copy Mode Priority
1136S131CA

Mode Priority : A. Paper Manual A. Size


Paper Priority
1136S107CA

Paper Pr. 3 4 1 5 2
1136S105CA

Europe Area

USA, Canada Area

1 2 3 4 5

1 2

1136S001AA 1136S001AA

1136S002AA 1136S002AA

* The Drawer number flashes to indicate that the corresponding Drawer has been selected
for the Paper Priority Mode.

* Initial setting: 1

S-61

Exposure Priority

Expo. Priority : Auto Exposure Manual Exposure


1136S112CA

* When automatic exposure is selected, the manual copy exposure level can be set.
(Initial setting: EXP 5 (center)) 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "AUTO". 2) Using either of the Exposure Control Keys, select the exposure level. 3) Enter that level with the OK Key. Finishing Priority

Sorter Priority : NonSort Sort Group Staple


1136S114CA

Auto Expo. Level

Auto Expo. Level : Darker Normal Lighter


1136S111CA

Screen Display Darker Normal Lighter

Description Equivalent to EXP 7 Equivalent to EXP 6 Equivalent to EXP 5

Manual Expo. Adjust

Manual Expo. Adj : Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3


1136S113CA

Screen Display Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Lamp Voltage (V) Corresponding to EXP 1 2 3 +5 +6 4 +2 +3 +4 5 0 0 0 6 2 3 4 7 4 5 7 8 6 7 8 9 9

Description (Original Types) Originals with halftone images such as photos

+12 +8 +12 +9

9 Various types of originals 9 Originals with a colored background or faint text

+12 +10 +7

S-62

Counter Removal

Counter Removal : Panel Reset Panel Not Reset


Intelligent Sort
1136S110CA

Sort / Non-Sort Auto Change : YES NO


1136S115CA

Condition The copy cycle is initiated using a single original in the Sort Mode. The copy cycle is initiated to make two or more copies using two or more originals in the Non-Sort Mode.

Screen Display YES NO YES NO

Operation The copier switches from Sort to Non-Sort. The copier remains in the Sort Mode. The copier switches from Non-Sort to Sort. The copier remains in the Non-Sort Mode.

Energy Saver Mode

Energy Saver : YES (1 min.) NO


1136S109CA

* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the Energy Saver Mode
using the Multi-Copy Keys (1 to 10 minutes). Auto Panel Reset

Auto Panel Reset : YES (1 min.) NO


1136S108CA

* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the automatic panel reset
function using the Multi-Copy Keys (1, 2, 3 or 5 minutes). Drum Dehumidify

Drum Dehumidify : YES (AUTO) NO


1136S130CA

S-63

Special Paper

Special Paper : 1 :S0 2 :S1 3 :S0 4 :S0 5 :S0


1136S129CA

Setting procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the Drawer. (The corresponding number flashes.) 2) Using the Cursor Key, select the paper type in accordance with the following table:

Europe Area

2 3 4 5

USA, Canada Area

1136S001AA 1136S001AA

1136S002AA 1136S002AA

Screen Display S0 S1 S2 S3

Description Standard paper (no special paper setting) Recycled paper Special paper Reused paper (2-sided copying disabled)

APS Function (Selection sequence) O (2) x x O (1)

Automatic Drawer Switching (Only paper of the same type) O O x O

After making the special paper setting, press the Paper Select Key to call the following
screen to the Message Display: Example: When S1 has been set for the 2nd Drawer, S2 for the 3rd Drawer, and S3 for the 4th Drawer

A4 B4 A5

S1 S2

B5 A4 Manual
1136S128CA

Note: When "S3" has been set for a given Drawer:

If 2-sided copying has been set, the "S3" Drawer cannot be selected. If the "S3" Drawer has been set, 2-sided copying cannot be selected.

S-64

Custom Inch Area Metric Area

Erase 0 (1/2") Margin 0 (1/2") x0.612 AUTO


1136S132EA

Erase 0 (10mm) Margin 0 (10mm) x0.707 AUTO


1136S121CA

Setting method Erase, Margin 1. Use the Cursor Key to select the desired item. 2. Press the Clear Key to clear the current value. 3. Press the Multi-Copy Keys to input a new value in accordance with the following table. 4. Press the OK Key to enter that value. Note: Only 1/2" or 10 mm is available for Erase and Margin.

Zoom ratio Use the Reduction, Full Size or Enlargement Keys to select.

Paper Use the Paper Select Key or Auto Paper Mode Key to select.

Screen Display

Erase

NO

1136S011AA

1136S012AA

1136S013AA

1136S014AA

Margin

NO

1136S015AA

1136S016AA

S-65

Custom 2 in 1

Erase 0 (10mm) Margin 0 (10mm) x0.707 AUTO


Inch Area Metric Area

1136S121CA

Custom Book Mode

Erase 0 (1/2") Margin 0 (1/2") x1.000 Letter


Custom 2 in 1 Separation

1136S133EA

Erase 0 (1/2") Margin 0 (1/2") x1.000 A4


1136S119DA

Inch Area

Metric Area

Erase 1 (1/2") Margin 2 (1/2") x1.632 AUTO


Administrator Mode

1136S134EA

Erase 1 (1/2") Margin 2 (1/2") x1.414 AUTO


1136S120DA

Enter Admin. #:
1136S135CA

Setting procedure 1) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter the Administrator Number (identification number.) registered in the Security Mode of the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

User Help Copy Track


1136S118CA

3) Use the Cursor Key to select either item and press the OK Key to change the screen as shown below: When "User Help" has been selected "User Help" indicates that when the copier is fitted with the DT-103, a code (3 digits) for a request to replenish toner, paper, etc. can be sent to the center. Note that when no code has been entered, only the state of the machine is sent.

User Help : 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000

1136S137CA

Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired number. (The number selected flashes.) 2) Press the Clear Key to clear the current code and use the Multi-Copy Keys to enter a 3-digit code.

S-66

When "Copy Track" has been selected Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES" or "NO". 2) Press the OK Key to move to the setting of the next option.

Copy Track : YES NO


"YES" selected

1136S138CA

"NO" selected

Max. Copy Sets : limited to not limited

1136S139CA

"Max. Copy Sets" indicates the maximum number of copy cycles that can be entered using the Multi-Copy Keys. Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES". 2) Press the Clear Key to clear the number of copy cycles and use the Multi-Copy Keys to input the maximum number of copy cycles. 3) Press the OK Key to enter the value and switch to either of the following screens:

User Help Copy Track Copy Track Data


1136S136CA

User Help Copy Track


1136S118CA

"Copy Track Data" is used to register and change the identification number and clear the count on an account basis and is shown when "Copy Track" YES has been selected. Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "Copy Track Data". 2) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

Copy Track Data : Register Access # Account Counter

1136S140CA

3) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired item. By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

S-67

When "Register Access #" has been selected "Register Access #" allows the access number (identification number) to be registered or changed on an account basis.

Register Access # : Account # Access #

1136S141CA

Procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the desired account number (1 to 26). 2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input the "Access #" (4 digits: 0001~9999). 3) Press the OK Key to enter the account access number and switch the screen to the next account.

When "Account Counter" has been selected "Account Counter" allows the count of the Size/Total Counter to be displayed and cleared on an account basis.

Account # : Total Size


Procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the account number (1 to 26). 2) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired Counter. 3) Press the Clear Key to clear the count.

1136S142CA

S-68

LIST OF SETTINGS TO BE MADE DUE TO PARTS REPLACEMENT OR MEMORY CLEARING


PWB-A PWB-A (except (Including RAM RAM pack) pack) Original Size Memory Detecting Clear Sensor

Settings To Be Made Due to Parts Replacement or Memory Clearing Users Choice input Tech. Rep. Choice input Adjust input Level History input Paper Size input Marketing Area setting ADF Setting F5 Mode F7 Mode F8 Mode FF Mode Memory Clear Initialize "PC Drum" in the Port/Option Counter cleared "Starter" in the Port/Option Counter cleared Setting of S1A on PWB-A

PC Drum

Starter

AIDC Sensor

ATDC Expesure Sensor Lamp

q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q

q q q

q q q q q q q

: This function is only used to load or change the starter.

S-69

Copyright 1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD Printed in Japan


Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD.

1136-7997-11 94075480 Printed in Japan

EP2050
TROUBLESHOOTING

CONTENTS
: Except the U.S.A. and Canada 1 1. INTRODUCTION 1-1. General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 1-2. How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 1-3. Reading the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 2 2. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE 1. Paper Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-8 2. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings . . . . . . . . . . . T-11 3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-13 3-1. Copier Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-13 3-2. Transport/Separator Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-19 3-3. Multi Bypass Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-24 3-4. Fusing/Exit Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-28 3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-30 3-6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-34 3-7. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-37 3-8. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-45 3 3 MALFUNCTIONS 1. Detection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-49 2. Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64 2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1s Failure to Turn C0010: Main Drive Motor M1 Turning at Abnormal C0010: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64 2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4s Failure to Turn C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5s Failure to Turn C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at C004b: Abnormal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-66 2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8s Failure to C0070:Turn C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at C0071: Abnormal Timing C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9s Failure to C0070:Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-70

CONTENTS
2-4. C0200: PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator C0200:Coronas Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-72 2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1s Failure to Turn ON C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal C0410: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-74 2-6. C0500: Warming-up Failure C0510: Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature C0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature C0522: Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction . . T-76 2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction C0601: SCP Board PWB-J Malfunction C0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Malfunction C0660: Scanner Load Failure C06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND Signal C06F0 to C06F7: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-79 2-8. C0610: Lens Motion Failure C0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-81 2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3s Failure to Turn ON C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal C0E01: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-83 2-10. C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA2s Failure to Turn ON . . . . T-85 2-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor C0FE1 to C0FFF: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-86 2-12. C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . T-88 2-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction Failure C0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction Failure C0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 V G Correction Failure C0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure . . T-89 2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-90 2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0904: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn (except the C0904: U.S.A. and Canada) C0950: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0954: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn . . . . . . T-91 . 2-16. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure C0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure

ii

CONTENTS
C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure C0994: Main Tray Elevator Motor M26s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . T-94 2-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure C0999: Shifter Return Failure C099A: Shifter Return Failure C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure C099C: Shift Motor M27s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-97 2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-100 2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates Home C0d00: Position Detection Failure C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position Detection C0d00: Failure C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31s Failure to Turn C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal C0d00: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-105 3 Power is not Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-109

iii

1 INTRODUCTION
1-1. General Precautions
1. When servicing the copier with its covers removed, use utmost care to prevent your hands, clothing, and tools from being caught in revolving parts including the chains and gears. When servicing the copier with the Lower Rear Cover removed, be sure to install the jig. 2. Before attempting to replace parts and unplugging connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet. 3. Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed circuit. 4. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be sure to use the green wire (GND). 5. When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from the wall outlet of the same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads. 6. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or damaged.

1-2. How to Use This Book


1. If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the text only instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedure applicable within the defective unit. 2. All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions. 3. For the removal procedures of covers and parts, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT. 4. The troubleshooting procedures are given in the order of greater frequency of trouble or order of operation. 5. The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

1-3. Reading the Text


1. The paper transport failure troubleshooting procedures are given according to the symptom. First identify the location where the paper is present and start the procedure for that particular location. For malfunction troubleshooting, start with step 1 and onward. 2. Make checks in numerical order of the steps and, if an item is checked okay, go to the next step.

Pattern 1 Step Check Item 1 2 Is --? Result YES Action Do this.

Pattern 2 Step Check Item 1 Is --? Result YES NO 2 Action Do this. Check that.

Go to step 2 if it checks okay.

Go to step 2 if it checks okay.

T-1

3. Methed for Checking Control Parts with Loads To check the Control parts with loads easier and safer, this copier allows the Technical Representative to determine whether a control part is fully operational and signals are input and output properly by changing or checking the I/O port data of the board IC with the copier in the standby state (including where a misfeed or malfunction condition exists). Procedure 1) On the circuit diagram accompanying the text, locate the I/O port of the control part which is probably faulty when a misfeed or malfunction occurs. 2) Select the function "Port" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode and show on the Message Display the screen containing the ports identified in step 1 above. (See SWITCHES ON PWBs.) NOTE: Some paper path sensors can be checked by the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check." 3) Change or check the input or output port data to check that the control part is operational and signals are input and output properly. 4) If the control part does not operate after the output port data has been changed, select "Control Board" of "I/O Check" and determine whether the cause of the problem is the board or any other functional unit. NOTE:The output ports that can be checked by "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode are only those given on p. T-63.

T-2

Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Output Port Data Example 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at the Paper Take-Up Section of the copier.

Procedure
1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for SL2 is the 8th one of P7 of the "Port" screens.

1136C01TAA

2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs.) and show the following screen.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T034AA

3) Move the cursor to P7 and move the underline to the 8th port. Check that the data for the 8th port of P7 is "1."

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T035AA

T-3

4) Press the Multi-Copy Key "0" to change the data from "1" to "0." Then, SL2 is energized for approx. 5 seconds.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111110

1136T036AA SL2 is operational if it makes its operating sound. SL2 is faulty if no operating sound is heard.

Note: As soon as the data is changed, the underline moves to the leftmost port whose data can be changed. 5) If SL2 did not operate, run the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check."

PWB check Press the OK key to Start the copy cycle.


1136T037CA

6) The following message appears if no signals are output from PWB-A to SL2.

Call your Technical Rep: Code:C0328


1136T038CA

Note: See p. T-63 for malfunction codes for the output signals.

T-4

Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Input Port Data 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at the Paper Take-Up Section of the copier. Example 1: Using the function "Port" of "I/O Check"

Procedure
1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for PC56 is the 1st one of P11 of the "Port" screens.

1136C02TAA

2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs) and show the following screen. At this time, check that the data for the 1st port of P11 is "H."

P11 HHLLLLLL P12 HHHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T039AA

3) Open the Upper Right Door and move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56. 4) Close the Upper Right Door to create a misfeed condition. 5) Select "Port" again and show the following screen.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T040CA

T-5

6) Show the data for P11 and check that the data for the 1st port has changed from "H" to "L."

P11 LHLLLLLL P12 HHHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T041AA

PC56 is operational if the data is "L."

PC56 is faulty if the data is "H."

T-6

Example 2: Using the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check"

Procedure
1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check" and show the following screen. At this time, check that data for the 1st sensor code is "1."

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T042CA
2) Open the Upper Right Door and move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56. 3) Close the Upper Right Door and check that the data for the 1st sensor code has changed from "1" to "0."

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 01111111111111


1136T043CA
PC56 is operational if the data is "0." PC56 is faulty if the data is "1."

T-7

2 PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE


1. Paper Misfeed
When a paper misfeed occurs in the copier, the corresponding Misfeed Location LED on the Monitor Display blinks to let the user know where the misfeed has occurred. If an LED lights up steadily, it indicates that there might be a sheet of paper present at that particular location in the copier.

Except USA, Canada Area


4

USA, Canada Area


4

10

10

8 9 3
9

8 3

1136T006DA

1136T007EA

Misfeed Location LEDs on Monitor Display Blinking There is a misfeed at that location. Light Steady Light There might be a sheet of paper stopped at that location.

Misfeed Locations Indicated by Misfeed Location LEDs Steady/ Blinking LED

: When an option is installed


Ref. Page T-24 to 27 T-13 to 18 T-30 to 36, T-45 to 48

Misfeed Location Multi bypass take-up and transport Copier take-up and vertical transport Paper Feed Cabinet take-up, vertical transport, Duplex Unit Automatic/Duplexing Document Feeder Transport/Separator Fusing/Exit Duplex Unit vertical transport Duplex Unit storage Sorter/Staple Sorter

T-19 to 23 T-28 to 29 T-37 to 44 T-43

T-8

Misfeed Detecting Sensors Layout

U.S.A. and Canada

: When an option is installed

Paper Exit Switch S53

Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55

Transport Roller Sensor PC54

Duplex Unit
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56

Duplex Vertical
Transport Sensor 2 PC12

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57

Vertical
Transport Sensor 3 PC17

Duplex Unit
Paper Entry Sensor PC14

Vertical
Transport Sensor 4 PC22

Duplex Unit
Turnover Path Sensor PC13

Duplex Unit 3rd Drawer


Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16

T-9

Except U.S.A. and Canada

When an option is installed


Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Transport Roller Sensor PC54

Paper Exit Switch S53

Duplex Unit
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57

Duplex Vertical
Transport Sensor 2 PC12

Vertical
Transport Sensor 3 PC17

Duplex Unit
Paper Entry Sensor PC14

Duplex Unit
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16

Duplex Unit
Turnover Path Sensor PC13

Vertical
Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22

3rd Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21

4th Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC29

T-10

2. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings


The table below lists the types of misfeed detection classified by the misfeed locations and
corresponding detection timings. Note: For the types of misfeed detection and detection timings in the options, see the Service Manual for the options. Paper Take-Up Misfeed Type Detection Timing 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.57 seconds after 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 has been energized.

ON SL2 OFF
H

Approx. 2.57sec

PC56

1136T33TCA

Paper take-up failure detection 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.57 seconds after 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL3 has been energized. PC56 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after it has been blocked (L). PC57 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after it has been blocked (L).

SL3 PC57

ON OFF
H L

Approx. 2.57sec

1136T34TCA

PC56

T A4 crosswise paper : T=Approx. 2.0sec


1136T35TCA

Paper take-up trailing edge detection

PC57

T A4 crosswise paper : T=Approx. 2.0sec


1136T36TCA

Leading edge detection by Transport Roller Sensor PC54

PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.31 seconds after PC56 has been blocked (L).

PC56 PC54

L H L

Approx. 1.31sec

1136T37TCA

PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.0 seconds after PC57 has been blocked (L).

PC57 PC54

L H L

Approx. 2.0sec

1136T38TCA

T-11

Multi Bypass Misfeed Type PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.48 seconds after Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 has been energized. Detection Timing

Bypass paper take-up failure detection

ON CL3 OFF
H

Approx. 1.48sec

PC54

1136T39TCA

Transport/Separator Misfeed Type Trailing edge detection by Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Leading edge detection by Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Detection Timing PC54 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after the TRON signal has been input.
TRON
H

PC54 L A3 lengthwise paper : T=Approx. 2.9sec

1136T40TCA

PC55 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 0.63 seconds after PC54 has been blocked (L).

PC54 PC55

L H L

Approx. 0.63sec

1136T41TCA

Trailing edge detection by PC55

PC55 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of approx. 0.69 seconds after PC54 has been unblocked (H).

PC54 PC55

L H L

Approx. 0.69sec

1136T42TCA

Fusing/Exit Misfeed Type Leading edge detection by Paper Exit Switch S53 S53 is not deactuated (L) even after the lapse of approx. 3.36 seconds after the TRON signal has been input. Detection Timing

TRON
Approx. 3.36sec

ON S53 OFF
1136T43TCA

Trailing edge detection by S53

S53 is not actuated (H) even after the lapse of approx. 3.58 seconds after PC55 has been unblocked (H).

PC55

Approx. 3.58sec

ON S53 OFF
1136T44TCA

T-12

3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures 3-1. Copier Take-Up Misfeed


Symbol PC54 PC56 PC57 SL2 SL3 CL1 PWB-A Name Transport Roller Sensor 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid Paper Transport Clutch Master Board

1136T008AA

1136C04TAA

T-13

x Copier Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Dose the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Are the Separator Fingers on both sides of the Drawer in position? Are the Separator Fingers deformed? Is the Trailing Edge Stop or Edge Guide in good position? Are the Paper Lifting Springs positioned correctly? Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-8 set to "1"? Replace PWB-A. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Instruct the user to load the paper so that it rests under the Fingers. Replace the Fingers. Change the position of the Edge Stop or Guide. Change the position of the Springs or add one as necessary. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up Rolls.

Paper is not taken


up at all.

Paper is
stationary before the Paper Take-Up Sensor. 2

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T044AA

NO

4) Does SL2 operate when the data for P7-8 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0328" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run?

Perform step 12. YES

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace SL2.

NO

T-14

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL3 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-7 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Replace PWB-A.

10

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T045AA

NO

4) Does SL3 operate when the data for P7-7 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0327" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is the Clutch Spring deformed or worn?

Perform step 12. YES

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace SL3.

11

NO

12

YES

Replace the Clutch Spring.

T-15

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Are the Vertical Transport Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is the Paper Take-Up Guide Plate or Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Check 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 1 is set to "1."

Result YES

Action Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Rollers. Correct, replace, or clean the Guide Plate.

Paper is
stationary at the Vertical Transport Section.

YES

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC56.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T046CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56. 3) Has the data for 1 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC56. Replace PWB-A. YES

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 01111111111111


1136T047CA

T-16

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 2 is set to "1."

Result

Action

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC57.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T048CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC57. 3) Has the data for 2 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC57. Replace PWB-A. YES

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 10111111111111


1136T049CA

Check Paper Transport Clutch CL1 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-4 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-4 set to "1"? 5 Replace PWB-A.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T050AA

NO

4) Does CL1 operate when the data for P7-4 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0324" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run?

Perform step 6. NO

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace CL1.

NO

T-17

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Are the Transport Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check Transport Roller Sensor PC54 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 9 is set to "1."

Result YES

Action Replace or clean the Transport Rollers.

Paper is
stationary at the Transport Rollers.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC54.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T051CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC54. 3) Has the data for 9 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC54. Replace PWB-A. YES

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111011111


1136T052CA

T-18

3-2. Transport/Separator Misfeed


Symbol PC54 PC55 CL2 SL1 M4 PWB-A HV1 Name Transport Roller Sensor Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor Synchronizing Roller Clutch Separator Solenoid Suction Fan Motor Master Board High Voltage Unit

1136C03TAA

T-19

x Transport/Separator Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code A is set to "1." Check the actuator for operation. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.

Paper is
stationary at the Synchronizing Roller.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T053CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC55. 3) Has the data for A changed from "1" to "0" ? Replace PC55.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111101111


1136T054CA

NO

T-20

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-5 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Replace PWB-A.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T055CA

NO

4) Does CL2 operate when the data for P7-5 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0325" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is a given length of loop formed before the Synchronizing Roller? Is the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate deformed or dirty? Are the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Wires deteriorated or dirty? Is the Paper Guide above the Paper Separator Corona deformed or dirty? Are the Synchronizing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check the Paper Separator Corona Remote signal from the PWB-A. 5

Perform step 5. YES

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace CL2.

NO

NO

Adjust the loop length using Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-23 (Loop Length Adjustment). Correct, clean, or replace the Guide Plate. Clean the wires or replace the Coronas Unit.

Paper is
stationary near the PC Drum. 1

YES

YES

YES

Clean or replace the Paper Guide. Clean or replace the Synchronizing Rollers. Replace PWB-A.

YES

YES Replace High Voltage Unit HV1 or Coronas Unit. NO

* Does the malfunction


code "C0322" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run?

T-21

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Separator Solenoid SL1 for operation. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P6-2 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-2 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Paper is wedged
at the Paper Separator Fingers.

Replace PWB-A.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T056CA

NO

4) Does SL1 operate when the data for P6-2 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C031F" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Are the Paper Separator Fingers deformed or dirty?

Perform step 3. YES

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace SL1.

NO

YES

Correct or clean, or replace, the Paper Separator Fingers.

T-22

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Referring to step 2 on p. T-18, check Transport Roller Sensor PC54. Referring to step 2 on p. T-20, check Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55. Do the Suction Belts turn properly? Check Suction Fan Motor M4 for rotation.(See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P6-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-3 set to "0"?

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary on the Suction Belts.

NO

Check the drive gear and timing belt.

Replace PWB-A.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T057CA

NO

Is M4 turning at half speed at this time? 4) Does the M4 speed change from half to full speed when the data for P6-3 is changed from "0" to "1"? Does the malfunction code "C0320" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Perform step 5. NO

YES

Replace PWB-A. Replace M4.

NO

T-23

3-3. Multi Bypass Misfeed

Symbol PC51 SL4 CL3 PWB-A

Name Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch Master Board

1136T010AA

1136C05TAA

T-24

x Multi Bypass Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step Check Item Is the paper fed out of the copier properly when it is taken up and fed in from the 1st or 2nd Drawer? Does the following message appear when a sheet of paper is placed on the Multi Bypass Table? 2 YES Result Action Perform the troubleshooting procedure for "Copier Take-Up Misfeed" or "Transport/Separator Misfeed." Remove the paper and perform step 3.

NO

NO

Perform step 4.

X1.000 M FEED
1136T058CA

Check Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P12-2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P12-2 set to "H" (when no paper is loaded). NO Check the actuator for operation.

P11 HHLLLLLL P12 HHHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T059CA

3) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC51. 4) Reselect "Port."

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T060CA

5) Show the data for P12-2. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?

Replace PC51. NO

P11 HHLLLLLL P12 HLHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T061AA

Replace PWB-A. YES

T-25

Symptom

Step 4

Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 for operation (lowering the Paper Take-Up Rolls) as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P13-8 2) Select the function "Port."

Result NO

Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.

Paper is not taken


up at all.

YES

3) Is the data for P13-8 set to "1"?

Replace PWB-A.

P11 HHLLLLLL P12 HLHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T062AA

NO

4) Does SL4 operate to lower the Paper Take-Up Rolls when the data for P13-8 is changed from "1" to "0"? Does the malfunction code "C0316" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Check Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-6 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-6 set to "1"?

Perform step 10. YES

YES

Replace PWB-A. Adjust the stroke of SL4 or replace SL4.

NO

Replace PWB-A.

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T063AA

NO

4) Does CL3 operate when the data for P7-6 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.)

Perform step 10. YES

T-26

Symptom

Step

Check Item Does the malfunction code "C0326" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is the Pressure Pad or Guide Plate deformed or dirty? Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

Result YES

Action Replace PWB-A. Replace CL3.

NO

10

YES

Clean or replace the Pressure Pad or Guide Plate. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up Rolls.

11

YES

T-27

3-4. Fusing/Exit Misfeed

Symbol S53 M4 PWB-A

Name Paper Exit Switch Suction Fan Motor Master Board

1136T011AA

1136C06TAA

T-28

x Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate dirty with toner? Referring to steps 3, 4, and 5 on p. T-23, check the Suction Belts and Suction Fan Motor M4 for rotation. Are the Fusing Rollers scratched or dirty? Or, has the replacement time arrived for the Rollers? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty with toner or worn? Are their edges damaged? Is the Oil Roller dirty? Or, has the replacement time arrived for the Roller? Check Paper Exit Switch S53 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code B is set to "1." Check the actuator for operation. Clean or replace the Rollers. YES Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Correct or clean, or replace, the Guide Plate.

Paper is
stationary before the Fusing Roller.

YES

The paper is
stationary at the Fusing Roller. 1

YES

Correct or clean, or replace the Fingers.

Clean or replace the Roller. YES

Paper is
stationary after the Paper Exit Roller/Rolls.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T064CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to deactuate S53. 3) Has the data for B changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace S53. Replace PWB-A. YES

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111110111


1136T065CA

T-29

3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed (Except the U.S.A. and Canada)

Symbol PC21 PC22 PC29 M21 M22 M23 PWB-A PWB-A

Name 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 4 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Drive Motor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202 Master Board

1136C23TAA

T-30

x PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is the Paper Take-Up Motor (M22 or M23) turning when the Start Key is pressed? 3 NO Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Check for possible overload. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check the Motor (M22 or 23).

Paper is not taken


up at all.

Paper is
stationary before the Paper Take-Up Sensor. 2

YES YES

Is the Paper Take-Up Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 3 is set to "1."

YES

Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up or Separator Roll.

Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC21.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T071CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC21. 3) Has the data for 3 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC21. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11011111111111


1136T066CA

YES

T-31

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC29 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 4 is set to "1."

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC29.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T067CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC29. 3) Has the data for 4 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC29. Replace PWB-A or PF-202 PWB-A. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M21. Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11101111111111


1136T068CA

YES

Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when the Start Key is pressed?

NO

YES Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

YES

T-32

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check PC22 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 8 is set to "1."

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary near Vertical Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC22.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T069CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC22. 3) Has the data for 8 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC22. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111110111111


1136T070CA

YES

Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

NO

Check the Paper Feed Cabinet for positive connection to the copier. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.

YES

T-33

3-6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed

Symbol PC21 PC22 M21 M22 PWB-A PWB-A

Name 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 4 Vertical Transport Drive Motor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board

T-34

x PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M22 turning when the Start Key is pressed? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M22.

Paper is not taken


up at all.

Paper is
stationary before 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21. 2

YES

NO

YES Is the Paper Take-Up Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 3 is set to "1."

Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up or Separator Roll.

YES

Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC21.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T071CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC21. 3) Has the data for 3 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC21. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11011111111111


1136T066CA

YES

T-35

Symptom

Step

Check Item Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when the Start Key is pressed?

Result

Action First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M21.

NO

YES Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check PC22 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 8 is set to "1."

Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.

YES

Paper is
stationary near Vertical Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC22.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T069CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC22. 3) Has the data for 8 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC22. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111110111111


1136T070CA

YES

Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

NO

Check the Paper Feed Cabinet for positive connection to the copier. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.

YES

T-36

3-7. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed


Symbol PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PC30 SL31 SL5 M31 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-G Name Duplex Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Empty Sensor Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Gate Switching Solenoid Exit/Duplex Solenoid Duplex Unit Drive Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D Master Board Duplex Unit Master Board

1136C25TAA

T-37

x Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P7-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-1 set to "1"? 2 Replace EP2050 PWB-A. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.

Paper is
stationary near the Exit Section.

HLH HL P5 P6 10 LH H P7 11111111
1136T075CA

NO

4) Does SL5 operate when the data for P7-1 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Are the Exit/Duplex Switching Plate and Upper and Lower Guide Plates deformed or dirty?

YES

Check the Clutch Spring for deformation and wear. Replace SL5.

NO Clean or replace the Plates. YES

T-38

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-1 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section of the Duplex Unit.

P41 P42 11 P43

1 11 LHHH
1136T076CA

NO

First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

4) Does M31 operate when the data for P42-1 is changed from"1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.)

NO

First check Duplex drive connections. Then, if necessary, replace M31, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.

YES Check Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code C is set to "1."

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC30.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T077CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC30. 3) Has the data for C changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC30. Replace EP2050 PWB-A . YES

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111011


1136T078CA

T-39

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Duplex Vertical Transport Sensor 2 PC12 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Port: P8-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P8-3 set to "H"?

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section of the Duplex Unit.

P8 HHHH HLH P9 HLLHHHLL P10


1136T079AA

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC12. NO

4) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC12. 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T080CA

6) Show the data for P8-3. Has it been changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Replace PC12. Replace EP2050 PWB-A.

P8 HHLH HLH P9 HLLHHHLL P10


1136T081AA

YES

T-40

Symptom

Step

Check Item Are the Paddle Roller, Slip Roller/Rolls, and Rolls B Release Lever deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

Result NO

Action Check the drive connection from the Duplex Unit. Clean or replace the Roller and/or Roll. Check the Release Lever mechanism.

Paper is
stationary near the Turnover Section. 1

YES

Check Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor PC13 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Port: P22-4 (PF-202) P38-4 (PF-102) P30-4 (PF-2D) 2) Select the function "Port." 3) <For PF-202> Is the data for P22-4 set to "H"? Check the actuator for operation. Check PC13.

P20 LL00HL00 00LL00 P21 P22 HHLHLL


1136T082AA

2 <For PF-102> Is the data for P38-4 set to "H"?

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL11 H LHHL
1136T146AA

NO

<For PF-2D> Is the data for P30-4 set to "H"?

P29 P30 P31

00 00 LLHLH L
1136T083AA

4) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC13.

T-41

Symptom

Step

Check Item 5) Select "Port" again.

Result

Action

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T084CA

6) <For PF-202> Show the data for P22-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Replace PC13. First replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P20 LL00HL00 00LL00 P21 P22 HHLLLL


1136T085AA

<For PF-102> Show the data for P38-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?

YES

P38 LLLHL11 H LHHL P39 P40


1136T086AA

<For PF-2D> Show the data for P30-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?

P29 P30 P31

00 00 LLLLH L
1136T087AA

T-42

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Is the Paper Guide Mylar deformed or dirty?

Result NO YES

Action Check the Mylar moving mechanism. Clean or replace the Mylar.

The leading edge


of the paper is stationary inside the Duplex Unit.

Check Duplex Unit Gate Switching Solenoid SL31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-5 set to "1"? 2 First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

P41 P42 11 P43

1 11 LHHH
1136T088AA

NO

4) Does SL31 operate when the data for P42-5 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Check Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor PC14 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code D is set to "1."

NO

Replace SL31. Check the Clutch Spring for deformation and wear.

YES

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC14.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T089CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC14. 3) Has the data for D changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC14. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check. 123456789ABCDE 11111111111101


1136T090CA

YES

T-43

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Duplex Unit Paper Empty Sensor PC15 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Move the actuator with a sheet or paper to block PC15. 2) Slide the Duplex unit back in. 3) Is the following message on the control panel ?

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary near the take-up port of the Duplex Unit.

First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102 PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary. YES

Press the Start key to eject all the Copies at :


1136T150CA

4) Remove the sheet of paper to unblock PC15. 5) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P43-6 set to "H"?

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC15.

P41 P42 11 1 01 P43 LHHH


1136T091AA

NO

6) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC15. 7) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T092CA

8) Show the data for P43-6. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Replace PC15. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102 PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

P41 P42 11 1 01 P43 LLHH


1136T093AA

YES

T-44

3-8. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed


Symbol PC16 PC17 SL33 CL31 M21 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-G Name Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 3 Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Clutch Vertical Transport Drive Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D Master Board Duplex Unit Master Board

1136C26TAA

T-45

x Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid SL33 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-2 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-2 set to "1"? 2 First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.

Paper is not taken


up at all.

P41 P42 11 1 11 P43 LHHH


1136T094AA

NO

4) Does SL33 operate when the data for P42-2 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Check Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Clutch CL31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-5 set to "1"? 3

NO

Replace SL33. Check the pick-up mechanism.

YES

P41 P42 11 1 11 P43 LHHH


1136T095AA

NO

First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

4) Does CL31 operate when the data for P42-5 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Are the Take-Up Roll, Feed Roll, and Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?

NO

Replace CL31. Check the Clutch.

YES

Clean or replace the Rolls. YES

T-46

Symptom

Step

Check Item Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when a copy is taken up and fed into the copier from the Duplex Unit?

Result

Action First check Duplex drive connections. Then, if necessary, replace M21, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Rollers and Guide Plate.

Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section.

NO

YES Are the Vertical Transport Rollers and Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code E is set to "1."

YES

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC16.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T096CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC16. 3) Has the data for E changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC16. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111110


1136T097CA

YES

T-47

Symptom

Step

Check Item Check Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 7 is set to "1."

Result

Action

Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section.

Check the actuator for operation. Check PC17.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111111111111


1136T098CA

NO

2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC17. 3) Has the data for 7 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC17. First replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Paper Path Sensor Check 123456789ABCDE 11111101111111


1136T099CA

YES

T-48

3 MALFUNCTIONS
The copier CPU is capable of self-diagnosis of the copier conditions and, when detecting a malfunction, it shows the corresponding malfunction code on the Message Display. Each malfunction code indicates the particular part which has developed a malfunction and the type of malfunction.

Call your Technical Rep. : Code : C0


1136T100CB

Represents the malfunction detail. Indicates the particular malfunctioning part in the section. Indicates the malfunctioning section.

Malfunction Resetting Procedure After the source of the malfunction has been eliminated: Press the Trouble Reset Switch on Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board PWB-I for an Exposure Lamp failure (C04**) and fusing failure (C05**). Swing open and close the Front Door for any other malfunctions. Disconnect and connect the option or open and close the option door for malfunctions of options.

1. Detection Timing Code Description Detection Timing The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 has been energized.
ON M1 OFF
Main Drive Motor Lock Signal

C0000 Main Drive Motor M1s failure to turn

H L

1sec

1.5sec

1136T45TCA

Drive

C0010 Main Drive Motor M1 turning at abnormal timing

The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 has been deenergized.
ON M1 OFF
Main Drive Motor Lock Signal

H L

1sec

1.5sec

1136T46TCA

T-49

Code

Description

Detection Timing The Suction Fan Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M4 has been energized.
ON OFF
H L

C0040 Suction Fan Motor M4s failure to turn

M4

Suction Fan Motor Lock Signal

1sec

1.5sec

1136T47TCA

C004A Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5s failure to turn

The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M5 has been energized.
ON OFF
H L

M5

Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock Signal

1sec

1.5sec

1136T48TCA

C004b Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 turning at abnormal timing Drive

The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M5 has been deenergized.
ON OFF
H L

M5

Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock Signal

1sec

1.5sec

1136T49TCA

C0070 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8s failure to turn

The output from Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 does not go HIGH within 5 seconds after M8 has been energized.
ON OFF
H 5sec L

M8 PC35

1136T18TAA

The output from PC35 does not go LOW within 10 seconds after it has gone HIGH following the energization of M8.
ON OFF
10sec H L

M8 PC35

1136T19TAA

T-50

Code

Description

Detection Timing The PC35 output is HIGH 2 seconds after M8 has been deenergized.
ON OFF
H L

C0071 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 turning at abnormal timing

M8 PC35

2sec

1136T20TAA

C0072 Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9s failure to turn

When the current toner-to-carrier ratio is 2% lower than the SCH-90 setting and the Add Toner Indicator is not lit on the control panel, a toner replenishing sequence is carried out (M9 is turned); the toner-to-carrier ratio does not increase 1% within 140 seconds or 2% within 220 seconds.

PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

Drive

C0200 PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas malfunction

The Short Circuit Detection signal (SCD) remains LOW for a continuous 600-msec. period while the PC Drum Charge Corona or Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas remain ON.

PC Drum Charge, Image ransfer/Paper Separator Coronas SCD

ON OFF
H L 600msec

1136T50TCA

C0400 Exposure Lamp LA1s failure to turn ON Exposure Lamp

The output from AE Sensor Board PWB-H has not become 4.0 V or less for the period between when LA1 turns ON and the Scanner starts a scan motion and when the Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) turns ON (goes LOW).
LA1 BASE PWB-H ON OFF
H L

4.0V
1136T22TAA

T-51

Code

Description

Detection Timing The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for a continuous 3-second period at any timing while the output from Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 remains LOW.
H

C0410 Exposure Lamp LA1 turning ON at abnormal timing

PC81 L 4 .0V
3.0sec

Exposure Lamp

PWB-H
1136T23TAA

The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for a continuous 3-second period while the output from Size Reset Switch S108 remains LOW (i.e., while the Original Cover remains closed).
H

S108 L 4 .0V PWB-H


1136T24TAA
3.0sec

C0500 Warming-up failure

Fusing Unit

When Power Switch S1 or Front Door Interlock Switch S21 is ON, the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller: (Less than 165C) * Does not reach 100C within 180 seconds. * Does not reach 150C within 60 seconds after it has reached 100C. * Does not reach 175C within 60 seconds after it has reached 150C. * Does not reach 200C within 240 seconds after it has reached 150C. (165C or more) * Does not reach 200C within 60 seconds. After the copier has left the Energy Saver mode:

* Does not reach 200C within 120 seconds.


C0510 Abnormally low fusing temperature C0520 Abnormally high fusing temperature C0522 Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 malfunction The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller remains 130C or less for a continuous 5-second period after the copier has warmed up. The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller remains 230C or more for a continuous 5-second period after the copier has warmed up. The voltages from TH1 and TH2 remain 0.165 V or less for a continuous 1-second period after the copier has warmed up.

T-52

Code

Description

Detection Timing Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-J for 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, the Forward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J does not go from LOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt is made to turn M2 backward.
ON OFF

C0600 Scanner Motor M2 malfunction

M2

Encoder Pulse
100 to 130msec

Forward H Rotation Signal L Backward H Rotation Signal L


1136T51TCA

C0601 SCP Board PWB-J malfunction

Optical Section (Scanner)

Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-J for 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, the Forward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J goes from LOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt is made to turn M2 backward.

M2

ON OFF

Encoder Pulse
100 to 130msec

Forward H Rotation Signal L Backward H Rotation Signal L


1136T52TCA

C0650 Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 malfunction

<At the start of the Scanners scan motion> PC81 is not unblocked H even after the lapse of a given period of time. <At the end of the Scanners return motion> PC81 is not blocked L even after the lapse of a given period of time. The M2 speed control does not change from the Acceleration to Constant Speed control for the period between when the SHOME signal goes LOW and when a LOW TRON signal is detected.
Acceleration Constant Speed

C0660 Scanner load failure

M2
1136T53TCA

T-53

Code

Description

Detection Timing <During prescan> When the Scanner is at a position other than home, the SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after S1 has been turned ON. The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gone from LOW to HIGH. <During a copy cycle> When the Scanner is at a position other than home, the SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 7 seconds after the SCAN signal has gone LOW. The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gone from LOW to HIGH. The SHOME signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 7 seconds after it has gone LOW. The BASE signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The BASE signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the TRON signal has gone LOW. <During prescan> The TRON signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has gone LOW. <During a copy cycle> The TRON signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The TRON signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The SCEND signal lapse of 5 seconds HIGH. <During a copy cycle> The SCEND signal lapse of 5 seconds HIGH. does not go LOW even after the after the TRON signal has gone

C06F0 SHOME signal failure

C06F1 SHOME signal failure C06F2 BASE signal failure Optical Section (Scanner) C06F3 BASE signal failure

C06F4 TRON signal failure

C06F5 TRON signal failure

C06F6 SCEND signal failure

does not go LOW even after the after the SHOME signal has gone

C06F7 SCEND signal failure

The SCEND signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after it has gone LOW.

T-54

Code

Description

Detection Timing The output from Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even after the lapse of a given period of time after Lens Motor M6 has been energized.

C0610 Lens motion failure

Optical Section (Lens) C0620 4th/5th Mirrors motion failure Optical Section (Mirror)

The output from Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even after the lapse of a given period of time after Mirror Motor M7 has been energized.

T-55

Code

Description

Detection Timing The LA3 Malfunction signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-second period while LA3 remains ON.

C0E00 Main Erase Lamp LA3s failure to turn ON

LA3

ON OFF
1.0sec H L

LA3 Malfunction Signal

1136T54TCA

Erase Lamps

C0E01 Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at abnormal timing

The LA3 Malfunction signal remains LOW for a continuous 1-second period while LA3 remains OFF.

LA3

ON OFF
1.0sec H L

LA3 Malfunction Signal

1136T55TCA

C0E20 Image Erase Lamp LA2s failure to turn ON C0F02 Original Size Detecting Board UN2 malfunction

The LA2 gate array is defective according to the self-diagnoses made immediately after Main Drive Motor M1 has been deenergized. In F7 test operation: 1) The Busy signal does not go LOW within approx. 800 msec. after the Initial signal has gone LOW, or undefined data is input to the master CPU. 2) If 1 is checked okay, the Busy signal goes HIGH within approx. 200 msec. 3) If both 1 and 2 are checked okay, the Busy signal does not go HIGH within approx. 4,000 msec. 4) If 1, 2, and 3 are checked okay, undefined data is input to master CPU within approx. 500 msec.
H

Initial Signal L

Sensors

Busy Signal
4) 1) 3) 2) 800msec 200msec 400msec 500msec

1136T56TCA

Under normal conditions: 1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx. 3,000 msec. or more. 2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.

Busy Signal
70msec 70msec 3000msec 70msec 70msec

1136T57TCA

T-56

Code

Description

Detection Timing When S1 is turned ON: 1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx. 5,000 msec. or more. 2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.
5000msec. H Busy Signal L H

C0F02 Original Size Detecting Board UN2 malfunction

Sensors

Busy Signal L 1136T60TCA

T-57

Code

Description

Detection Timing and Sensor Layout <Detection Timing> After having read the output data from PC115 to PC119, UN2 determines that there is a failure. <Sensor Layout> (Metric Areas) : PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations A

C0FE1 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE2 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE3 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FE4 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE5 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure Original Size Detecting Board C0FE6 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FE7 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FE8 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE9 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FEA Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FEB Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEC Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FED Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEE Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEF Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure

C D

A B

(Inch Areas) : PC116 (option), : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115 A

C D

T-58

Code

Description

Sensor Layout

C0FF0 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FF1 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF2 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF3 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FF4 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF5 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FF6 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure Original Size Detecting Board C0FF7 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure B A (Metric Areas) : PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations

C D

C0FF8 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF9 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFA Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFB Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure

(Inch Areas) : PC116 (option), : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115

C0FFC Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFD Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure C0FFE Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure

C D

C0FFF Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , , and failure (Metric Areas)

T-59

Code

Description

Detection Timing <In normal conditions> The output from PWB-H remains approx. 0.18 V or less for a continuous 2-second period when LA1 is OFF, PC81 output is LOW, or S108 output is LOW (i.e., the Original Cover is closed). <In F5 or FF test operation> The output from PWB-H is less than 1.8 V when 100% of PWB-H is illuminated. The output from PWB-H is 1.8 V or more when PWB-H is not illuminated. The output from PWB-H is outside the target range (1.8 0.05 V) when 50% of PWB-H is illuminated. <When the optimum LA1 voltage is changed after the intensity of LA1 light has been corrected> The output from PWB-H when 100% of PWB-H is illuminated is smaller than that for halftones stored in the F5 test operation. The output from PWB-H when PWB-H is not illuminated is smaller than that for halftones stored in the F5 test operation. The output from PWB-H when 50% of PWB-H is illuminated is outside the range of output for halftones stored in the F5 test operation 0.05 V. <At 1st F5 or FF test operation> The UN3 output is 0.95 V or more when all signals from the 4-bit analog switch are made LOW (i.e., with a maximum load resistance). The UN3 output is less than 1.05 V when all signals from the 4-bit analog switch are made HIGH (i.e., with a minimum load resistance). <In F5 or FF test operation> The AIDC Sensor output does not fall in the range between 1 V and less than 1.2 V when the intensity of the sensor LED is varied. <At the 1st F5 or FF test operation> 1) The grid voltage (VG) of 550 V (reference) is output. 2) A solid black pattern is produced. 3) If the AIDC Sensor output is less than 4.2 V at this time: The grid voltage does not become 4.2 V or more even when it is increased 3 steps (90 V). <At the 1st F5 or FF test operation> 1) LA1 is turned ON with 58 V (reference). 2) A halftone pattern is produced. 3) The LA1 output is varied so that the AIDC Sensor output falls within the target range. 4) The AIDC Sensor output does not fall within the target range even after steps 1 to 3 have been repeated eight times, the output value being outside the error level.

C0F10 AE Sensor Board PWB-H malfunction

Sensors

C0F20 AIDC Sensor UN3 variation correction failure

C0F21 AIDC Sensor UN3 contamination correction failure

C0F22 AIDC Sensor UN3 VG correction failure

C0F23 AIDC Sensor UN3 exposure correction failure

T-60

Code

Description

Detection Timing The UN4 output remains approx. 0.18 V or less or 4.52 V or more for a continuous 3-second period while M1 remains energized. When the value shown for "Set" of "ATDC Level" of "Level History" is greatly different from the value set in the FF test operation:

C0F30 ATDC Sensor UN4 failure Sensors PF-202

C0F31 ATDC Sensor UN4 failure

C0900 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction C0904 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motors failure to turn C0950 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction C0954 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motors failure to turn C0d00 Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates home position detection failure PF-2D/AD-5 C0d20 Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit home position detection failure C0d50 Duplex Unit Drive Motors failure to turn C0d51 Duplex Unit Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing C0990 Main Tray upward motion failure C0991 Main Tray downward motion failure C0992 Main Tray downward motion failure C0993 Main Tray upward motion failure C0994 Main Tray Elevator Motors failure to turn C0996 3rd Drawer lock release failure PF-102 C0998 Shifter transfer failure C0999 Shifter return failure C099A Shifter return failure C099b Shifter transfer failure C099c Shift Motors failure to turn C0F79 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor failure Main Tray Paper Empty Board failure Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor See PF-102 Service Manual. See PF-2D/AD-5 Service Manual. See PF-202 Service Manual (except the U.S.A. and Canada).

T-61

Code ST-206/ S-205 ST-101/ S-104 ST-206/ S-205 C0b00 C0b01 C0b60 C0b61 C0b62 C0b63 C0b64 ST-101 ST-206 ST-206 C0b10

Description Transport drive malfunction

Detection Timing See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.

Bin motion failure

See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104 Service Manuals.

C0b11 Paper Clamp Unit motion failure C0b12 C0b13 C0b30 Paper Aligning Mechanism drive C0b31 failure C0b50 C0b51 Stapling failure C0b52

See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104 Service Manuals. See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.

ST-101 ST-206

See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104 Service Manuals.

ST-206

C0b70 C0b71

Hole punching failure

See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.

T-62

The copier performs a self-diagnostic sequence to determine if the microprocessor outputs a signal to each of the IC ports on Master Board PWB-A properly. It is intended for detecting the following malfunctions (C03). If the microprocessor fails to output any of these signals or if any of the electronic components on the board (driver IC, etc.) is faulty, the copier determines that there is a faulty condition existing and shows on the Message Display the corresponding malfunction code.

* To correct any of these problems, replace the Master Board.


Code Output Signal Port Code C0321 SL5 IC1A P85 C0322 Separator/Bias REM Drum Charge/Image C0323 Transfer REM C0324 CL1 C0325 CL2 C0326 CL3 C0327 SL3 C0328 SL2 C0329 M1 REM C032A Vendor (in copy cycle) C032B Vendor (size) C032C UN2 Area 1 C032D UN2 Area 2 C032E ENABLE C032F Seal Bias REM C0331 RY3 REM C0332 M5 REM C0333 LA3 Output Signal Port IC4A BPA7 IC4A BPA6 IC4A BPA5 IC4A BPA4 IC4A BPA3 IC4A BPA2 IC4A BPA1 IC4A BPA0 IC5A BPC7 IC5A BPA7 IC5A BPA6 IC5A BPA5 IC5A BPA4 IC5A BPA2 IC5A BPA1 IC5A BPC5 IC5A BPC4 IC5A APC3

The input signal starting the diagnostic C0300 sequence does not go HIGH. C0311 AVR PWM C0312 H1 REM C0313 Grid PWM C0314 PWB-H PWM C0315 SL-4 UP C0316 SL-4 DOWN C0317 LA2 DATA C0318 LA2 MODE C0319 LA2 CLK C031A LA2 STROBE C031B M8 REM C031C M9 REM C031D AVR REM C031E SCAN C031F SL1 REM C0320 M4 Switching

IC1A P50 IC1A P51 IC1A P56 IC1A P60 IC5A APC1 IC5A APC0 IC1A P64 IC1A P65 IC1A P66 IC1A P67 IC4A APA3 IC4A APA2 IC4A APA1 IC4A APA0 IC4A APC6 IC4A APC5

T-63

2. Troubleshooting Procedures 2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1s Failure to Turn C0010: Main Drive Motor M1 turning at abnormal timing
Symbol M1 PWB-A Name Main Drive Motor Master Board

1136C07TAA

T-64

Step

Check Item Perform the following steps to check if M1 turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P16-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P16-1 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Replace PWB-A.

P14 1100101 P15 LLH P16 1111


1136T101AA

NO

4) Does M1 turn when the data for P16-1 is changed from "1" to "0"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M1 is stationary (Main Drive Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P12-7 2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P12-7 set to "H"?

YES

Perform step 3.

NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M1.

P11 HHLLLLHL P12 HHHLLLHL P13 HHHH1111


1136T102AA

YES

Does M1 make unusual noise when turning?

YES

Check the rollers, gears, and belts for possible overload.

T-65

2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4s Failure to Turn C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5s Failure to Turn C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at Abnormal Timing
Symbol M4 M5 PWB-A Name Suction Fan Motor Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Master Board

1136C09TAA

T-66

* C0040
Step 1 Check Item Is M4 turning at half speed when the copier is in the standby state? Perform the following steps to check if M4 speed changes from half to full speed when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P6-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-3 set to "0"? 2 Replace PWB-A. Result NO Action Perform step 3.

P5 HHH LL P6 10 LH H P7 11111111
1136T103AA

NO

4) Does M4 start turning at full speed when the data for P6-3 is changed from "0" to "1"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M4 is turning at half speed (Suction Fan Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P8-7 3 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P8-7 set to "L"?

Replace M4. NO

NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M4.

P8 LHHH HLH P9 HLLLHHHH P10


1136T104AA

YES

T-67

1136C08TAA

T-68

* C004A, C004b
Step Check Item Perform the following steps to check if M5 turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P16-4 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P16-4 set to "1"? 1 Replace PWB-A. Result Action

P14 1100101 P15 LLH P16 1111


1136T105AA

NO

4) Does M5 turn when the data for P16-4 is changed from "1" to "0"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M5 is stationary (Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P8-6 2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P8-6 set to "H"?

YES

Perform step 3.

NO

Replace PWB-A. Replace M5.

P8 LHHH HLH P9 HLLLHHHH P10


1136T106AA

YES

Does M5 make unusual noise when turning?

YES

Check the fan for possible overload.

T-69

2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8s Failure to Turn C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at Abnormal Timing C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9s Failure to Turn
Symbol M8 M9 PC35 S106 PWB-A Name Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch Master Board

1136C10TAA

T-70

* C0070, C0071
Step 1 2 Check Item Is C0071 being shown? Does the Toner Bottle turn when 2 to 3 copies are made with the Original Cover raised? Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Cover raised. Does the voltage across PJ20AB-3 on PWB-A and GND become DC0V when the Toner Bottle turns and DC5V when the Toner Bottle is stationary? Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Cover raised. Does the voltage across PJ20AA-4 on PWB-A and GND become DC0V when the Toner Bottle turns and DC24V when the Toner Bottle is stationary? Result YES NO YES Replace PWB-A. Check the Toner Bottle Holder or replace PC35. Action Perform step 3. Perform step 4.

NO

YES

Replace M8. Replace PWB-A.

NO

* C0072
Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Is PJ20A securely plugged into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Are CN38 and CN44 connected securely? Is toner not moving along the Toner Conveying Screw of the Developing Unit? Is the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper so scarce that the system detects a toner-empty condition? Check the input signal from S106 when a toner-empty condition is detected as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 6 1) Port: P5-7 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P5-7 set to "L"? Check the output signal to M9 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 7 1) Port: P4-6 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P4-6 set to "0"? YES NO Replace M9. Replace PWB-A. NO YES Replace S106. Replace PWB-A. Result NO NO NO YES YES NO Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Connect them securely. Check the toner path. Perform step 6. Perform step 7.

T-71

2-4. C0200: PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Malfunction


Symbol HV1 PWB-A Name High Voltage Unit Master Board

1136C11TAA

T-72

Step

Check Item Does "C0200" remain shown even after the PC Drum Charge and Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas have been removed from the copier? Does "C0200" appear when the PC Drum Charge Corona is installed in the copier? Does "C0200" appear when the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas are installed in the copier? Does "C0200" remain shown even after CN1 has been unplugged from HV1?

Result

Action Perform step 4.

YES

YES

Clean or replace the PC Drum Charge Corona. Clean or replace the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas. Replace HV1. Replace PWB-A.

YES

NO YES

T-73

2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1s Failure to Turn ON C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing
Symbol LA1 TF2 PWB-A PWB-H PU2 Name Exposure Lamp Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse Master Board AE Sensor Board Power Supply Unit

1136C12TAA

T-74

Step

Check Item Perform the following steps to check if LA1 turns ON when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P4-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P4-7 set to "1"?

Result

Action

Replace PWB-A.

P2 1111HHL1 P3 1 L 1 H P4 11111111
1136T107AA

NO

4) Does LA1 turn ON when the data for P4-7 is changed from "1" to "0"? Is the circuit across CN7-1 and 2 on the LA1 side conductive when CN7 (2P) is disconnected? Is the voltage across PJ3-1 and 3 on PU2 AC100V? Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 and GND 4.0 V or less when the Power Switch is turned ON or in the standby state?

YES

Perform step 4.

Check LA1 and TF2 for continuity. NO

YES NO YES NO

Replace PU2 Check the power supply. Clean the AE Sensor or replace PWB-H. Replace PWB-A.

T-75

2-6. C0500: C0510: C0520: C0522:

Warming-up Failure Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature Abnormally High Fusing Temperature Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction
Symbol H1 TS1 TH1 TH2 SSR1 PWB-A Name Fusing Heater Lamp Fusing Thermoswitch Fusing Front Thermistor Fusing Rear Thermistor SSR Master Board

1136C13TAA

T-76

* C0500, C0510
Step 1 Check Item Does H1 light up when the Power Switch is turned ON? Result YES NO 2 Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the resistance across CN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side infinity? Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the resistance across CN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side infinity? Check the H1 ON/OFF signal from PWB-A when the Front Door is closed with S1 turned ON. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P1-7 2) Select the function "Port." 4 3) Is the data for P1-7 set to "0"? Replace PWB-A. YES NO YES NO Action Check TH1/TH2 for installation or clean it. Perform step 4. Replace TH1. Replace PWB-A. Replace TH2. Replace PWB-A.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010101


1136T108CA

NO

Disconnect CN4 (16P). Is there continuity across CN4-8 and 9 on the Fusing Unit side?

YES NO

Replace SSR. Check H1 and TS1 for continuity.

T-77

* C0520, C0522
Step 1 Check Item Does H1 remain lit up even after the copier has completed warming up? Check to see if H1 is turned OFF by changing the H1 ON/OFF signal from PWB-A. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P1-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P1-7 set to "1"? 2 Replace PWB-A. Result YES NO Action Perform step 2. Perform steps 3 and 4.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T109CA

NO

4) Does H1 go out when the data for P1-7 is changed from "0" to "1"? Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the circuit across CN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side short-circuited? Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the circuit across CN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side short-circuited?

NO YES NO YES NO

Replace SSR.

Replace TH1 Replace PWB-A. Replace TH2. Replace PWB-A.

T-78

2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction C0601: SCP Board PWB-J Malfunction C0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Malfunction C0660: Scanner Load Failure C06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND Signal Failure
Symbol PC81 M2 PWB-J PWB-A Name Scanner Reference Position Sensor Scanner Motor SCP Board Master Board

1136C14TAA

T-79

* C0600, C0601
Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Is PJ6J securely plugged into PWB-J? Is the voltage across PJ6J-6 on PWB-J and GND DC5V when the Power Switch is turned ON? Is C0600 being shown? Is C0601 being shown? Result NO NO YES YES Replace M2. Replace PWB-J. Action Plug it in securely. Check the DC5V line.

* C0650
Step 1 2 Check Item Is PJ5J securely plugged into PWB-J and PJ43 into PC81? Is the Light Blocking Plate installed properly? Result NO NO YES Action Plug them in securely. Reinstall it. Replace PC81.

* C0660
Step 1 Check Item Do you feel an overload when you move the Scanner manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result YES Action Correct or replace the Cables or part being overloaded.

* C06F0 to C06F7
Step 1 Check Item Is PJ14AA securely plugged into PWB-A and PJ2J into PWB-J? Result NO YES Action Plug them in securely. Replace PWB-A or PWB-J.

T-80

2-8. C0610: Lens Motion Failure C0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure
Symbol PC86 PC90 M6 M7 PWB-J Name Mirror Reference Position Sensor Lens Reference Position Sensor Lens Motor Mirror Motor SCP Board

1136C15TAA

T-81

* C0610
Step 1 Check Item Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely into PWB-J, PJ47 into M6, and PJ31 into PC90? Does the voltage across PJ3J-2 on PWB-J and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC90 is blocked? Do you feel an overload when you move the Lens manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result NO Action Plug them in securely. Replace PC90. NO Correct or replace the Cable or part being overloaded. Replace M6 or PWB-J.

YES NO

* C0620
Step 1 Check Item Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely into PWB-J, PJ48 into M7, and PJ32 into PC86? Does the voltage across PJ3J-5 on PWB-J and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC86 is blocked? Do you feel an overload when you move the 4th/5th Mirrors manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result NO Action Plug them in securely. Replace PC86. NO Correct or replace the part being overloaded. Replace M7 or PWB-J.

YES NO

T-82

2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3s Failure to Turn ON C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal Timing
Symbol LA3 PWB-A Name Main Erase Lamp Master Board

1136C16TAA

T-83

* C0E00
Step 1 Check Item Does LA3 light up when the Start Key is pressed? Does the voltage across PJ25-1 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when the Start Key is pressed? Result YES YES NO Action Replace PWB-A. Replace LA3. Replace PWB-A.

* C0E01
Step Check Item Perform the following steps to check the input signal when LA3 is OFF (LA3 Malfunction signal). (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P9-1 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P9-1 set to "H"? 2 YES Replace LA3. Result Action

P8 HHHH HLH P9 HLLHHHHH P10


1136T110AA

NO

Replace PWB-A.

T-84

2-10. C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA2s Failure to Turn ON


Symbol LA2 PWB-A Name Image Erase Lamp Master Board

1136C17TAA

Step 1 2 3

Check Item Is PJ2A plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN26 connected securely. Is the voltage across CN26-6 and GND DC5V?

Result NO NO YES NO

Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Replace LA2. Check the 5V line.

T-85

2-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor Failure
Symbol PC115 PC116 PC117 PC118 Name Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3

1136C18TAA

T-86

* C0F02
Step 1 2 3 Check Item Is the jumper connector fitted properly across J1 and J2 on UN2? Are PJ62 plugged securely into UN2 and PJ14A into PWB-A? Is the voltage across PJ14AB-6 on PWB-A and GND changing between DC0V and 5V? Result NO NO YES NO Action Change the position of the jumper connector. Plug it in securely. Replace PWB-A. Replace UN2.

* C0FE1 to C0FFF
Step 1 2 Check Item Is the jumper connector fitted properly across J1 and J2 on UN2? Is each Original Size Detecting Sensor installed at the correct position? Does the malfunction code reappear after the corresponding Original Size Detecting Sensor has been replaced? Result NO NO Action Change the position of the jumper connector. Install it correctly.

YES

Replace UN2 or PWB-A.

Metric Areas : PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option)

Inch Areas : PC116 (option), : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115

A to E: Sensor Positions A

C D

C D

A B

1336C19TAA

T-87

2-12. C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction


Symbol PWB-H PWB-A Name AE Sensor Board Master Board

Step

Check Item Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 on PWB-A and GND 0.18 V or less when the Scanner is at its home position, LA1 OFF, and the Original Cover closed?

Result YES NO

Action Check the photo receiver of PWB-H for contamination or replace PWB-H. Replace PWB-A.

T-88

2-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction Failure C0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction Failure C0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 V G Correction Failure C0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure
Symbol UN3 PWB-A AIDC Sensor Master Board Name

1136C20TAA

Step 1 2 3 4

Check Item Is PJ20AA plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Is UN3 installed at the correct position? Is the photo receiver or LED of UN3 dirty?

Result NO NO NO YES NO

Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Install it at the correct position. Clean UN3. Replace UN3 or PWB-A.

T-89

2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure
Symbol UN4 PWB-A Name ATDC Sensor Master Board

1136C21TAA

Step 1 2 3 4 5

Check Item Is the value for "Set" of "ATDC Level" of "Level History" equal to the value given on the Adjust Label? Is PJ20AB plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Is UN4 installed at the correct position? Is the voltage across PJ20AB-8 on PWB-A and GND in the range between DC0.18V and 4.52V while M1 is turning?

Result NO NO NO NO YES NO

Action Enter the value given on the Adjust Label. Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Install it at the correct position. Replace PWB-A. Replace UN4.

T-90

2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Failure C0904: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn (except the U.S.A. and Canada) C0950: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Failure C0954: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn
Symbol PC19 PC23 PC27 PC28 M24 M25 PWB-A PWB-A Name 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202 Master Board

1136C28TAA

T-91

* C0900, C0950
Step 1 Check Item Is C0950 being shown? Block PC19 and make the following checks. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P21-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P21-5 set to "L"? Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P20 LL00HL00 P21 00LH00 P22 HHHHHH


1136T111AA

NO

Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC19.

4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and press down the Pressure Release Lever of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblock PC19). 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T112CA

6) Show the data for P21-5. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?

NO

Replace PC19.

P20 LL00HL00 P21 00HH00 P22 HHHHHH


1136T113AA

YES

First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

Block PC23 and make the following checks. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P20-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P20-1 set to "L"?

P20 LH00HL00 P21 00LL00 P22 HHHHHH


1136T114AA

NO

Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC23.

4) Slide out the 4th Drawer and press down the Pressure Release Lever of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblock PC23).

T-92

Step

Check Item 5) Select "Port" again.

Result

Action

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T115CA

6) Show the data for P20-1. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?

NO

Replace PC23.

P20 HH00HL00 P21 00LL00 P22 HHHHHH


1136T116AA

YES

First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

* C0904, C0954
Step 1 2 Check Item Is C0954 being shown? Does M24 turn when the 3rd Drawer is slid out and then into the copier? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the 3rd Drawer has been slid into position? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V when the 3rd Drawer is slid out and then into the copier (while M24 is turning). Result YES YES Action Begin with step 5. Perform step 4. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M24. Check the pulse disk. Replace PC27. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears for overload. Perform step 7. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M25. Check the pulse disk. Replace PC28. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears for overload.

NO YES NO

YES

Does M25 turn when the 4th Drawer is slid out and then into the copier? Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the 4th Drawer has been slid into position? Does the voltage across PJ10A-9 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V when the 4th Drawer is slid out and then into the copier (while M25 is turning).

YES

NO YES NO

YES

T-93

2-16. C0990: Main C0991: Main C0992: Main C0993: Main C0994: Main

Tray Tray Tray Tray Tray

Upward Motion Failure Downward Motion Failure Downward Motion Failure Upward Motion Failure Elevator Motor M26s Failure to Turn
Symbol PC2 PC5 PC19 M26 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-H Name Main Tray Lower Position Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor Main Tray Elevator Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Cabinet Transport Board

1136T029AA

T-94

* C0990, C0991
Step 1 Check Item Is C0991 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC19 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-5 set to "H"? 2 NO Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Paper Take-Up/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC19. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P35 HHHH H P36 LL00HL P37 00HH00


1136T117AA

YES

Move the PC19 actuator to block PC19 and check PC19 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-5 set to "L"? 3 NO Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Paper Take-Up/Feed Roll Assy. Replace PC19. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P35 HHHH L P36 HL00HL P37 00LL00


1136T118AA

YES

T-95

* C0992, C0993
Step 1 Check Item Is C0993 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC2, and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-7 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-7 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC2. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T119AA

YES

Unblock PC2 and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-7 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC2. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL11 H LHHL
1136T120AA

YES

* C0994
Step 1 Check Item Does M26 turn when the Paper Descent Key is pressed? Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 (down) on PF-102 PWB-A and GND, and across PJ11A-2 (up) and GND, change from DC0V to DC24V when the Drawer is slid in or the Paper Descent Key is pressed? (M26) Does the voltage across PJ10A-5 on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V while M26 is turning? (PC5) Result YES Action Perform step 3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M26 or check PWB-H and flat cable. Check the pulse disk, PC5, and PWB-H. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears and for overload.

NO

YES NO

YES

T-96

2-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure C0999: Shifter Return Failure C099A: Shifter Return Failure C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure C099C: Shift Motor M27s Failure to Turn
Symbol PC3 PC4 PC6 M27 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-H Name Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Paper Shift Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Cabinet Transport Board

1136T030AA

T-97

* C0998, C0999
Step 1 Check Item Is C0999 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC4 with a sheet of paper, and check PC4 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-3 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-3 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC4. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 L LHHL
1136T121AA

YES

Unblock PC4 and check PC4 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-3 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC4. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T122AA

YES

T-98

* C099A, C099b
Step 1 Check Item Is C099b being shown? Block PC3 and check PC3 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-8 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-8 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T123AA

YES

Unblock PC3 and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-8 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 H HHLH
1136T124AA

YES

* C099C
Step 1 Check Item Does M27 turn when the Drawer is slid in with a paper stack loaded in the Shift Tray? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 (moving to right) on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when the Drawer is slid in with a paper stack loaded in the Shift Tray? (M27) Does the voltage across PJ10-12 on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V while M27 is turning? (PC6) Result YES Action Perform step 3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M27 or check PWB-H and flat cable. Check the pulse disk and PWB-H. Replace PC6. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears and for overload.

NO

YES NO

YES

T-99

2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure

Symbol PC1
PWB-A (EP2050)

Name Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Main Tray Paper Empty Board Cabinet Transport Board

PC7 PC20 SL41 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-E PWB-H

1136C31TAA

T-100

*C0996 Step 1 Check Item Is SL41 energized after the Paper Descent Key has been pressed? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and then slide it in with no paper loaded in it. Then, check SL41 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P38-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P38-7 set to "1"? 2 First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. NO Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P38 P39 P40

LLHHL10 H HHHH
1136T125AA

4) Show the data for P38-7. Is SL41 operated when the data is changed from "1" to "0"? (Listen for the sound of operation.) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC7 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-6 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-6 set to "H"?

NO

Check wiring up to SL41 or replace SL41. Adjust the SL41 stroke or check the Drawer locking mechanism.

YES

Check PC7.

P35 HHHH H P36 LH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T126AA

NO

4) Slide the 3rd Drawer back in. 3 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T127CA

6) Show the data for P37-6. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Replace PC7 and Drawer Pushing Spring. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P35 HHHH L P36 HH00HL P37 00LL00


1136T128AA

YES

T-101

*C0F79 Step 1 Check Item Is C0F79 being shown with the Main Tray in the raised position? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make the following checks with no paper on PWB-E. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P36-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P36-1 set to "H"? Check PWB-E and flat cable. Check the sensor on PWB-E. Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P35 HHHH H P36 HH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T129AA

NO

4) Block PWB-E with a sheet of paper. 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T130CA

6) Show the data for P36-1. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Check PWB-H and flat cable. Replace PWB-E. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P35 HHHH H P36 LH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T131AA

YES

T-102

Step

Check Item Let a sheet of paper push up the actuator of PC20 and, in that condition, check PC20 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P35-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P35-8 set to "L"?

Result

Action

Check the actuator. Check PC20.

P35 HHHH L P36 HH00HL P37 00LL00


1136T132AA

NO

4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make sure that no paper is loaded on the Tray. 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T133CA

6) Show the data for P35-8. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?

NO

Check the actuator. Replace PC20. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P35 HHHH H P36 LH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T134AA

YES

T-103

Step

Check Item Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC1 with no paper on the Shift Tray. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P35-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P35-3 set to "H"?

Result

Action

Check PWB-E and flat cable. Check PC1.

P35 HHHH H P36 LH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T135AA

NO

4) Load the Shift Tray with paper. 5) Select "Port" again.

Port Data P0 1H11L P1 H1010111


1136T136CA

6) Show the data for P35-3. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?

NO

Check PWB-H and flat cable. Replace PC1. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

P35 LHHH H P36 HH00HL P37 00HH00


1136T137AA

YES

T-104

2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates Home Position Detection Failure C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position Detection Failure C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31s Failure to Turn C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal Timing
Symbol PC8
PWB-A (EP2050)

Name Duplex Gate Home Position Sensor Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home Position Sensor Duplex Unit Drive Motor Gate Motor Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D Master Board Duplex Unit Master Board

PC9 M31 M32 M33 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-G

1136C32TAA

T-105

C0d00
Step Check Item Does M33 turn when the Power Switch is turned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position? 1 Result Action Replace M33, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.

NO

YES Check PC9 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Block PC9. (The Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates are at their home positions.) 2) Port: P43-5 3) Select the function "Port." 2 4) Is the data for P43-5 set to "L"? NO

Replace PC9. Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order.

P41 P42 11 1 01 P43 LHHH


1136T138AA

YES

T-106

C0d20
Step Check Item Does M32 turn when the Power Switch is turned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position? Result NO YES Check PC8 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Block PC8. (The Trailing Gate Unit is at its home position.) 2) Port: P44-8 3) Select the function "Port." 2 4) Is the data for P44-8 set to "L"? NO Replace PC8. Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Action Replace M32, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.

P44 0000 HL P45 110000 P46


1136T141AA

YES

T-107

C0d50, C0d51
Step 1 Check Item Is C0d51 being shown? Check M31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P42-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-1 set to "1"? Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. NO Result YES Action Perform step 3.

P41 P42 11 P43

1 01 LHHH
1136T144AA

4) Does M31 operate when the data for P42-1 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Listen for the sound of operation.) Check the input signal when M31 is stationary (the Duplex Unit Drive Motor Lock signal) as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P44-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P44-7 set to "H"? 3

NO YES

Replace M31. Check for possible overloads on rollers and gears.

NO

Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Replace M31.

P44 0000 HL P45 110000 P46


1136T145AB

YES

T-108

3. Power is not Turned ON

Symbol S1 RY1 UN1 PWB-B PWB-A PWB-C PWB-D PU1 Main Relay

Name Power Switch

Control Panel MSC Board Master Board Power Supply Board Noise Filter Board DC Power Supply Unit

1136C22TAA

T-109

Symptom

Step 1

Check Item Is the source voltage being supplied to the circuit across PJ-1 and 3 of PU1? Is the voltage across PJ2-2 on PU1 and GND DC24V? Is the voltage across PJ5C-2 on PWB-C and GND 24V when S1 is OFF? Are the voltages across PJ5C-1 on PWB-C and GND, and across PJ5C-3 on PWB-C and GND, DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ8C-4 on PWB-C and GND DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ4-1 on PU1 and GND DC5V when S1 is ON? Does the voltage across PJ5AB-8 on PWB-A and GND instantaneously go from HIGH to LOW when S1 is turned ON? Are the voltages across PJ1C-3 on PWB-C and GND, and across PJ1C-5 on PWB-C and GND, DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ4-2 on PU1 and GND DC5V? Are all PJs on PWB-B plugged securely into position? Is PJ1I plugged securely into PWB-I? Is PJ5A plugged securely into PWB-A?

Result NO

Action Check the main fuse and supply power. If they check okay, replace PWB-D. Check the fuse on PU1 and, if it checks okay, replace PU1. Replace PWB-C.

RY1 is not turned


ON.

NO

NO Check S1. NO

Replace PWB-C. NO

Replace PU1. NO Replace PWB-A. NO

Check RY1. NO

No control panel
Indicators light up, though RY1 is turned ON.

NO

Replace PU1. Plug them in securely.

NO Plug it in securely. Plug it in securely. Replace PWB-A, PWB-B, UN1, or PWB-I.

NO NO YES

T-110

T-111

Step 1

Check Item

Result YES

Action

1) 2) 3)

NO

4) 5)

6)

NO

YES

1) 2) 3)

NO

4) 3 5)

6)

NO

YES

T-112

Copyright 1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD Printed in Japan


Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD.

1136-7998-11 94075480 Printed in Japan

Copyright 1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD Printed in Japan


Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

MINOLTA CO., LTD.

1136-7990-11 94075480 Printed in Japan